Canon LASER SHOT LBP3600 Laser Printer User's Guide

Canon LASER SHOT LBP3600 Laser Printer User's Guide
Add to My manuals

Below you will find brief information for Laser Printer LASER SHOT LBP3600. The LASER SHOT LBP3600 is a laser printer that provides high-quality printing. It can print a variety of documents, such as letters, reports, and presentations. The LASER SHOT LBP3600 can also print on a variety of paper types, including envelopes and labels. It can also perform two-sided printing, which can save paper and money.

advertisement

Assistant Bot

Need help? Our chatbot has already read the manual and is ready to assist you. Feel free to ask any questions about the device, but providing details will make the conversation more productive.

Canon LASER SHOT LBP3600 User's Guide | Manualzz

Laser Beam Printer

IMPORTANT:

Read this manual carefully before using your printer.

Save this manual for future reference.

ENG

LBP3600

Laser Printer

User's Guide

Manuals for the Printer

The manuals for this printer are divided as follows. Please refer to them for detailed information.

CD-ROM

Guides with this symbol are PDF manuals included on the accompanying CD-ROM.

Installation

Connecting to a Computer

Printing Methods

Basic Operations

Troubleshooting

• Setting Up the Network Environment for

Printing

• Managing the Printer on the Network

Environment

Only when the optional network board is installed

• Operating/Setting the Printer from the Web

Browser

Only when the optional network board is installed

Getting Started Guide

User's Guide

(This Manual)

Network Guide

Remote UI Guide

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

CD-ROM

To view the manual in PDF format, Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is required. If Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is not installed on your

• system, please download it from the Adobe Systems Incorporated website.

The printer illustration on the cover may differ slightly from your printer.

How This Manual Is Organized

Chapter 1 Before You Start Using This Printer

Chapter 2 Loading and Delivering Paper

Chapter 3 Setting Up the Printing Environment

Chapter 4 Printing a Document

Chapter 5 Routine Maintenance

Chapter 6 Optional Accessories

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

Chapter 8 Appendix

Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our products, if you need an exact specification, please contact Canon.

ii

Contents

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii

How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii

Symbols Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii

Buttons Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii

Operation Screens Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix

Abbreviations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix

Legal Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x

Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x

Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x

Disclaimers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x

Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images . . . . . . xi

Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii

Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv

Maintenance and Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

Chapter 1 Before You Start Using This Printer

Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Inner View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Turning the Printer ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Turning the Printer ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Turning the Printer OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Connecting to a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Using a USB Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Using a LAN Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Chapter 2 Loading and Delivering Paper

Paper Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Usable Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Paper Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Abbreviations of Paper Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Printable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Unusable Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Storing Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Storing Printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Paper Source Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Paper Capacity for Paper Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Selecting a Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Paper Delivery Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Output Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Paper Capacity for Paper Delivery Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Printing from a Paper Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Loading Paper in a Paper Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Loading Paper in Cassette 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Loading Paper in Cassette 2, 3, or 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Changing the Size of Paper in a Paper Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

Changing the Size of Paper in Cassette 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Changing the Size of Paper in Cassette 2, 3, or 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Setting Up the Printer Driver and Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53

Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

Printing Paper (Other than Envelopes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58

Printing Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67

2-sided Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76

Automatic 2-sided Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77

Loading Paper When Performing Automatic 2-sided Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80

Loading Paper in a Paper Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80

When Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82

Performing 2-sided Printing Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83

Chapter 3 Setting Up the Printing Environment

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

After Installing the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Steps for Printing to Be Followed Each Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Required System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

iii

Installing the CAPT Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

For Windows 98/Me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Installing from CD-ROM Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Installing with Plug and Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Installing from [Add Printer Wizard] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

For Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Installing from CD-ROM Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Installing with Plug and Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Installing from [Add Printer Wizard] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

For Windows XP/Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Installing from CD-ROM Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Installing with Plug and Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Installing from [Add Printer Wizard] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

After Completing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

Checking the Operations by Printer Status Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network . 3-57

Print Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58

For Windows 98/Me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58

For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

Installation on the Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67

Installing from CD-ROM Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68

Installing from [Add Printer Wizard] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73

Installing from [Windows Explorer]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75

Uninstalling the CAPT Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77

Chapter 4 Printing a Document

Printing from the Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Job Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Specifying the Printing Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

For Windows 98/Me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Displaying the [Document Properties] Dialog Box from the Application. . . 4-10

Displaying the [Printer Properties] Dialog Box from the [Printers] Folder . . 4-12

For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Displaying the [Document Properties] Dialog Box from the Application. . . 4-14

Displaying the [Document Properties] Dialog Box from the [Printers] Folder . . 4-15

Displaying the [Printer Properties] Dialog Box from the [Printers] Folder . . 4-17

Setting Printer Information Before Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Using the Printing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Various Pages in the Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

[Page Setup] Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

[Finishing] Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

[Paper Source] Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

[Quality] Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

[General] Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

iv

[Details] Sheet (Windows 98/Me only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

[Sharing] Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

[Ports] Sheet (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

[Advanced] Sheet (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

[Security] Sheet (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

[Configuration]/[Device Settings] Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

[Profile] Sheet (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Scaling Print Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Scaling a Document Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Scaling a Document Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Poster Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

Watermark Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47

Watermark Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47

Editing Watermarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Specifying a Custom Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

Printing Borders and Printing Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Selecting an Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

Print with Mixed Paper Sizes/Orientations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

Gutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

Specifying the Finishing Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

Specifying the Paper Feed Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63

Specifying the Print Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

Grayscale Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

Grayscale Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

Printing Grayscale Sample (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 only) . . . . . 4-68

Specifying Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

Adding a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

Editing/Deleting a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

PageComposer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

Viewing the Printer Settings/Restoring the Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77

Viewing the Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77

Restoring the Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

Printer Status Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79

Functions on the Printer Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79

Displaying the Printer Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

Setting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

[Utility] Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

[Device Settings] Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

[Refresh] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

[Resolve Error] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

Displaying Status When a Print Server is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

v

Chapter 5 Routine Maintenance

Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

When a Message Appears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Using Up Toner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Precautions for Handling Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Storing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Cleaning the Fixing Roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Cleaning the Transfer Roller and Photosensitive Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Adjusting the Printing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Checking the Printing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Adjusting the Printing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Cleaning the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Moving the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Handling the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Precautions for Handling the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Precaution for Storing the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Chapter 6 Optional Accessories

Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Paper Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Paper Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Duplex Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Network Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Paper Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Installation Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Removing the Packing Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Removing the Packing Materials from the 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66 . . . 6-10

Removing the Packing Materials from the 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66E . . . 6-13

Moving the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Installing the Paper Feeders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

Removing the Paper Feeders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

Duplex Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

Installation Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

Removing the Packing Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

Installing the Duplex Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

Removing the Duplex Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34

Network Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38

Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40

Installing the Network Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41

vi

Setting the Network Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45

Resetting the Network Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48

Removing the Network Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Alarm Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Procedure for Clearing Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Paper Jam in the Paper Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

Paper Jam in the Duplex Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

When the Message that Indicates the Paper Jam Does Not Disappear . . . . 7-29

Service Call Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Print Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Paper Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

When Nothing is Printed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Installation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

When Uninstallation Fails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

Uninstalling the USB Class Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

Problems During Local Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56

Installation Problems When the Printer is Shared on a Network . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

Miscellaneous Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58

Confirming the Printer Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60

Chapter 8 Appendix

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Software Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Dimensions of Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Print Monitor Installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Location of the Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

vii

Preface

Thank you for purchasing the Canon LASER SHOT LBP3600.

Please read this manual thoroughly before operating the printer in order to familiarize yourself with its capabilities, and to make the most of its many functions.

After reading this manual, store it in a safe place for future reference.

How To Use This Manual

Symbols Used in This Manual

The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions, handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.

WARNING

CAUTION

Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly.

In order to use the printer safely, always pay attention to these warnings.

Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons, or damage to property if not performed correctly.

In order to use the printer safely, always pay attention to these cautions.

IMPORTANT Indicates operational requirements and restrictions.

Be sure to read these items carefully in order to operate the printer correctly, and to avoid damage to the printer.

NOTE Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure.

Reading these notes is highly recommended.

Buttons Used in This Manual

The following button names are a few examples of how buttons to be pressed are expressed in this manual:

• Buttons on Computer Operation Screen : [Button Name]

Example: [OK]

[Details] viii

Operation Screens Used in This Manual

Operation screens used in this manual may differ from those on your computer depending on the system environment.

The buttons which you should press are marked with as shown below.

When multiple buttons can be pressed on the screen shot of computer operation screen, all buttons are marked. Select the button which suits your needs.

5

Click [Install].

Click this button for operation.

Abbreviations Used in This Manual

In this manual, product names and model names are abbreviated as follows:

Microsoft ® Windows ® 95 operating system :

Microsoft ® Windows ® 98 operating system :

Windows 95

Windows 98

Microsoft ® Windows ® Millennium Edition operating system :Windows Me

Microsoft ® Windows ® 2000 operating system : Windows 2000

Microsoft ® Windows ® XP operating system :

Microsoft ® Windows Server TM 2003 operating system :

Microsoft ® Windows ® operating system :

LASER SHOT LBP3600 :

Windows XP

Windows Server 2003

Windows

LBP3600 ix

x

Legal Notices

Trademarks

Canon, the Canon Logo, LASER SHOT, and LBP are trademarks of Canon Inc.

Adobe ® , Adobe Acrobat, and Adobe Reader are trademark of Adobe Systems

Incorporated.

Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

Windows Server is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States.

Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.

Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.

Copyright

Copyright 2003 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, or by any information storage or retrieval system without the prior written permission of

Canon Inc.

Disclaimers

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS

MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN,

INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO

MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE OF USE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT. CANON

INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES

RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.

Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the

Use of Images

Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of such images as scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability. A non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the use of the images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance.

• Paper Money

Money Orders

Certificates of Deposit

Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)

• Identifying Badges or Insignias

• Travelers Checks

Food Stamps

Passports

Immigration Papers

• Selective Service or Draft Papers

• Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)

• Bonds or Other Certificates of

Indebtedness

• Stock Certificates • Checks or Drafts Issued by

Governmental Agencies

• Motor Vehicle Licenses and

Certificates of Title

• Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without Permission of Copyright

Owner xi

Important Safety Instructions

Please read these "Important Safety Instructions" thoroughly before operating the printer. As these instructions are intended to prevent injury to the user or other persons or destruction of property, always pay attention to these instructions. Also, since it may result in unexpected accidents or injuries, do not perform any operation unless otherwise specified in the manual. Improper operation or use of this machine could result in personal injury and/or damage requiring extensive repair that may not be covered under your Limited Warranty.

Installation

WARNING

• Do not install the printer near alcohol, paint thinner, or other flammable substances.

If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the printer, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not place the following items on the printer. If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area inside the printer, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.

If these items are dropped or slipped inside the printer, immediately turn OFF the your local authorized Canon dealer.

- Necklaces and other metal objects

- Cups, vases, flowerpots, and other containers filled with water or liquids xii b

OFF

ON a

CAUTION

• Do not install the printer in unstable locations, such as unsteady platforms or inclined floors, or in locations subject to excessive vibrations, as this may cause the printer to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury.

• Never block the ventilation slots on the printer. The ventilation slots are provided for proper ventilation of working parts inside the printer. Blocking the ventilation slots can cause the printer to overheat, resulting in a fire. Never place the printer on a soft surface, such as a sofa or rug.

• Do not install the printer in the following locations, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock:

- A damp or dusty location

- A location exposed to smoke and steam such as cookeries and humidifiers

- A location exposed to rain or snow

- A location near water faucets or water

- A location exposed to direct sunlight

- A location subject to high temperatures

- A location near open flames

• When installing the printer, gently lower the printer onto the floor or other machine to avoid catching your hands, as this may result in personal injury.

• When connecting the interface cable, connect it properly according to this manual. If not connected properly, this may result in malfunction or electrical shock.

• When moving the printer, follow the instructions in this manual to hold it correctly.

Failure to do so may cause you to drop the printer, resulting in personal injury. (See

"Moving the Printer," on p. 5-37)

Power Supply

WARNING

• Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not place heavy objects on the power cord, or pull on or excessively bend it, as this could cause electrical damage and result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Keep the power cord away from a heat source; failure to do this may cause the power cord coating to melt, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not plug or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in electrical shock.

• Do not plug the power cord to a multiplug power strip, as this may cause a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not bundle up or tie the power cord in a knot, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Insert the power plug completely into the AC power outlet, as failure to do so may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not use power cords other than the power cord provided, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• As a general rule, do not use extension cords or plug extension cords to a multiple power strip. If extension cords must be used or plugged to a multiple power strip, however, use them observing the following points on user's own authority. If you use extension cords improperly, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.

- Do not connect one extension cord to another.

xiii

xiv

- Make sure that the voltage of the power plug is the one indicated in the rating label

(attached on the back of the printer) when you use the printer.

- Use an extension cord that allows the current value greater than the necessary one indicated in the rating label (attached on the back of the printer).

- When you use an extension cord, untie the cord binding, and insert the power plug completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the power cord and the extension cord.

- Periodically check that the extension cord is not overheated.

CAUTION

• Do not use power supplies with voltages other than those specified herein, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Always grasp the power plug when unplugging the power cord. Pulling on the power cord may expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If the power cord is damaged, this could cause current to leak, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.

• Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily. If objects are placed around the power plug, you will be unable to unplug it in an emergency.

Handling

WARNING

• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the printer. There are high-temperature and high-voltage components inside the printer which may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Electrical equipment can be hazardous if not used properly. To avoid injury, do not allow children access to the interior of any electrical product and do not let them touch any electrical contacts or gears that are exposed.

• If the printer makes strange noises, or emits smoke, heat or unusual smells, immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. Otherwise, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not use highly flammable sprays near the printer. If gas from these sprays comes into contact with the electrical components inside the printer, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Always turn OFF the power switch, and disconnect the interface cables when moving the printer. Otherwise, the power cord or interface cables may be damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not drop paper clips, staples, or other metal objects inside the printer. Also, do not spill water, liquids, or flammable substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, etc.) inside the printer. If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area inside the printer, it may result in a fire or electrical shock. If these items are dropped or slipped inside the printer, immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

• When unplugging the USB cable when the power is turned ON, do not touch the metal part of the connector, as this may result in electrical shock.

CAUTION

• Do not place heavy objects on the printer, as they may tip over or fall resulting in personal injury.

• Be careful when handling the expansion board. Touching the edges or a sharp portion of the expansion board may result in personal injuries.

• Turn OFF the power switch for safety when the printer will not be used for a long period of time such as overnight. Also, turn OFF the power switch on the right of the printer and unplug the power plug for safety when the printer will not be used for an extended period of time such as during consecutive holidays.

• The laser beam can be harmful to human bodies. Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the printer during any phase of user operation. Read the following remarks and instructions for safety.

- Never open covers other than those instructed in this manual.

- Do not remove the caution label attached to the cover of the laser scanner unit.

- If the laser beam escapes from the printer, exposure may cause serious damage to your eyes.

• It is confirmed that the LBP3600 is a Class 1 laser product in compliance with

IEC60825-1: 1993.

Maintenance and Inspections

WARNING

• When cleaning the printer, turn OFF the main power switch, then unplug the power plug. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Clean the printer using a slightly dampened cloth with water or a mild detergent diluted with water. Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the printer, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.

xv

• There are some areas inside the printer which are subject to high-voltages. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the printer, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the printer, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.

• Do not burn or throw a used toner cartridge into open flames, as this may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridge to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.

• Unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet regularly, and clean the area around the base of the power plug's metal pins and the AC power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure that all dust and grime is removed. If the power plug is plugged for a long period of time in a damp, dusty, or smoky location, dust can build up around the power plug and become damp. This may cause a short circuit and result in a fire.

CAUTION

• Never attempt to service this printer yourself, except as explained in this manual.

There are no user serviceable parts inside the printer. Adjust only those controls that are covered in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment could result in personal injury and/or damage requiring extensive repair that may not be covered under your Limited Warranty.

• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the printer may become hot during use.

When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the printer, do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as doing so may result in burns or electrical shock.

xvi

• When removing jammed paper or replacing a toner cartridge, take care not to allow the toner to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water.

Washing with warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.

• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the printer, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.

• When loading paper or removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the paper.

• When removing a used toner cartridge from the toner cartridge guide, remove the cartridge carefully to prevent the toner from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. If the toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.

Consumables

WARNING

• Do not throw a used toner cartridge into open flames, as this may cause toner remaining inside the cartridge to ignite and result in burns or a fire.

• Do not store a toner cartridge or copy paper in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the toner or paper to ignite and result in burns or a fire.

CAUTION

• Keep toner and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If these items are ingested, consult a physician immediately.

Others

WARNING

• The toner cartridge generates a low level magnetic field. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please move away from the toner cartridge and consult your physician.

xvii

xviii

Before You Start Using This Printer

1

CHAPTER

This chapter describes the major features and basic functions of this printer.

Features and Benefits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Parts and Their Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3

Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Turning the Printer ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Turning the Printer ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10

Turning the Printer OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11

Connecting to a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Using a USB Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13

Using a LAN Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15

1-1

1

Features and Benefits

High Performance Printing System "CAPT"

LBP3600 is equipped with the latest high performance printing system, "CAPT" (Canon

Advanced Printing Technology), that is compatible with Windows operation systems. As this system batch-processes the print data in a computer instead of a printer, it enables high-speed printing, making full use of the features of the computer. Also, a large amount of data can be processed without upgrading printer memory.

USB 2.0 High Speed Preinstalled

LBP3600 achieves high-speed transmission by supporting High-Speed I/F USB 2.0 that offers up to 480 Mbps transmission speeds.

Various Paper Handling Options

In addition to the standard multi-purpose tray and universal cassette, optional 250-sheet paper feeders are available, enabling the continuous automatic feeding of up to 1,100 of 5 different paper sizes. The multi-purpose tray have a wide array of uses, allowing you to perform 2-sided printing manually and print on various kinds of paper such as envelopes and as large as A3 size paper. Moreover, by installing the optional duplex unit, you can perform automatic 2-sided printing on the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray

(standard size paper only) or a paper cassette. By doing so, you can save paper and make the file space more efficient.

Low Power Consumption and Quick Startup

By adopting "On-demand Fixing System", LBP3600 achieves low power consumption and quick startup. This Canon's original technology enables instantaneous heating of the fusing heater only before printing, saving warm-up time. So, LBP3600 is always ready to print. Also, thanks to its power-saving design, the fixing unit's power consumption is very low when idle.

Supports Various Types of Media

LBP3600 supports various types of media, such as plain paper, heavy paper, envelops, transparencies, and labels.

Network-capable Printer

LBP3600 can be used as a network printer for Ethernet by installing the optional network board. The network board enables the operation of the printer using a Web Browser

"Remote UI" allowing you to specify settings and manage the printer from a computer on the network.

NOTE

For details on the operation systems that support the optional network board and procedure for setting the board, see "Network Guide".

1-2 Features and Benefits

Parts and Their Functions

This section describes the name and function of each part in order for you to use this printer properly to make full use of its functions.

Main Unit

The following are the parts and functions of the main unit.

CAUTION

Do not block the ventilation slots (including the air intake slot and exhaust slot) on the printer. If any ventilation slot is blocked, the temperature inside the printer may rise, resulting in a fire.

Front View

The following are the parts on the front side of the printer and their functions.

1 a k j i h g b c d e f

Show the status of the printer. (See p. 1-6)

Opened when removing paper jammed in the delivery area. Before removing the jammed paper, raise the top cover slowly and firmly, and open it

completely until it stops. (See p. 7-4)

Delivers paper with the printing side facing down.

(See p. 2-15)

Turns the power of the printer ON/OFF. (See p.

1-10)

Parts and Their Functions 1-3

1

Hold these grips when moving the printer.

(See p. 5-37)

Insert the paper size indicator for the paper loaded

in the paper cassette into the paper size slot. (See p. 2-42)

Up to 250 sheets of paper (64 g/m 2 ) at sizes of A3,

B4, A4, B5, A5, Ledger, Legal, Letter, and Executive

can be loaded. (See p. 2-18)

Holds down the paper loaded in the multi-purpose

tray. (See p. 2-58)

Adjust the position of the guide to the width of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray. You can load paper up to the load limit marks on this tray.

Pulled out so that paper will not hang over the edge when delivering long-size paper such as A3 or B4

paper. (See p. 2-16)

Load paper when feeding from the multi-purpose

tray. (See p. 2-57)

Opened when replacing the toner cartridge or when

clearing paper jams. (See p. 5-2)

Rear View

The following are the parts on the rear side of the printer and their functions.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the duplex unit connector, as this may result in damage to the printer or printer error.

a k b j i h g d e f c

1-4

Removed when installing the optional duplex unit. If the duplex unit is not installed, set the top rear cover properly. If the top rear cover is not set properly, an error message such as "Duplex Unit is not attached correctly" or "Toner Cover Open" appears in the

Printer Status Window.

Parts and Their Functions

Connected to the USB cable. Connect the other end

of the cable to the USB port on the computer. (See p. 1-13)

The optional network board is installed in this slot.

(See p. 6-38)

Not used for this printer. Do not open.

Intakes and exhausts air to cool the insides of the printer.

The serial number (Serial No.) for printer identification is indicated on this label. The number is required for receiving service or repairs. The current value indicated in this rating label shows the

average power current consumption. (See p. 8-13)

Removed when installing the optional duplex unit.

Used for connecting the optional duplex unit.

Connect the supplied power cord to this socket.

Intakes air to cool the insides of the printer.

Exhausts air to cool the insides of the printer.

Inner View

The following are the parts inside the printer and their functions.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the transfer roller, as this may result in deterioration in print quality.

a

1 b h g c d f e

Press to open the toner cover. (See p. 5-5, p. 7-9)

Opened when removing paper jammed inside the toner cover.

Opened when inserting the paper size indicator into the paper size slot or when setting the paper size dial to the size of the paper loaded in the paper

cassette. (See p. 2-41)

Set the dial to the size of paper in the paper

cassette. (See p. 2-42)

Insert the paper size indicator for the size of the

loaded paper into this slot. (See p. 2-42)

Opened when replacing the toner cartridge or

removing jammed paper. (See p. 5-5, p. 7-9)

Parts and Their Functions 1-5

1

Important part for transferring toner onto paper when printing.

When setting the toner cartridge, push it while aligning the projections on each side of the toner

cartridge with this guide. (See p. 5-7)

Indicators

NOTE

You can confirm information on the printer status using the Printer Status Window from

your computer. For details on the Printer Status Window, see "Printer Status Window," on p. 4-79.

Paper

Alarm

Ready a b c

Blinking: No paper or paper of an inappropriate size is loaded.

On: Service call is occurring.

Blinking: An error is occurring, disabling printing.

On: The printer is ready to print.

Blinking: The printer is conducting some operation such as printing, warming up, or pausing printing.

1-6 Parts and Their Functions

Connecting the Power Cord

This section describes the procedure for connecting the power cord. For details on

connecting the cord, see "Important Safety Instructions," on p. xii.

WARNING

• Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not place heavy objects on the power cord, or pull on or excessively bend it, as this could cause electrical damage and result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Keep the power cord away from a heat source; failure to do this may cause the power cord coating to melt, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not plug or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in electrical shock.

• Do not plug the power cord to a multiplug power strip, as this may cause a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not bundle up or tie the power cord in a knot, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Insert the power plug completely into the AC power outlet, as failure to do so may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not use power cords other than the power cord provided, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• As a general rule, do not use extension cords or plug extension cords to a multiple power strip. If extension cords must be used or plugged to a multiple power strip, however, use them observing the following points on user's own authority. If you use extension cords improperly, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.

- Do not connect one extension cord to another.

- Make sure that the voltage of the power plug is the one indicated in the rating label (attached on the back of the printer) when you use the printer.

- Use an extension cord that allows the current value greater than the necessary one indicated in the rating label (attached on the back of the printer).

- When you use an extension cord, untie the cord binding, and insert the power plug completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the power cord and the extension cord.

- Periodically check that the extension cord is not overheated.

CAUTION

• Do not use power supplies with voltages other than those specified herein, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.

1

Connecting the Power Cord 1-7

1

• Always grasp the power plug when unplugging the power cord. Pulling on the power cord may expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If the power cord is damaged, this could cause current to leak, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.

• Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily.

If objects are placed around the power plug, you will be unable to unplug it in an emergency.

IMPORTANT

• Do not plug the power cord into the auxiliary outlet on a computer.

• One AC power outlet should be used exclusively for the printer.

• Do not connect this printer to an uninterruptible power source. This may cause printer malfunction or breakdown at the occurrence of a power failure.

1

Make sure that the power switch of the printer is turned OFF.

The printer is OFF when " " of the power switch is pressed.

OFF

ON

1-8 Connecting the Power Cord

2

Plug the supplied power cord into the power socket.

1

3

Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.

Connecting the Power Cord 1-9

1

Turning the Printer ON/OFF

The power switch to turn the printer ON or OFF is located on the right side of the printer. Be sure to observe the following instructions in order to prevent unexpected problems.

Turning the Printer ON

In order to use this printer, you should press " " of the power switch to turn the printer ON. After running a self-diagnostic test on the main unit and optional accessories, the printer will be ready to print.

IMPORTANT

• Do not turn the power ON immediately after turning it OFF. After turning the power OFF, wait for 3 seconds or longer before turning it ON again.

• If the printer does not operate properly, or an error message appears in the Printer Status

Window, see "Troubleshooting," on p. 7-1.

• Be sure to set the paper cassette in the printer before you turn the power ON for the first time after you install the printer.

1

Press " " of the power switch on the printer.

OFF

ON

1-10 Turning the Printer ON/OFF

The indicators illuminate, and the printer initiates a self-diagnostic test on the main unit and optional accessories.

If no abnormality is found during the self-diagnostic test, the Ready indicator

(blue) illuminates, and the printer is ready to print.

Paper

Alarm

Ready

On

Turning the Printer OFF

Follow the instruction below to turn the power OFF.

IMPORTANT

• If the printer is used on a network, make sure that it is not printing data from another computer before turning the power OFF.

• If you turn the power of the printer OFF, all print data remaining in the printer memory will be erased. So, wait for the necessary print data to be printed before turning the power

OFF.

• Do not turn the power OFF when the printer is in any of the following status:

- While printing

- While running a self-diagnostic test immediately after turning the power of the printer

ON

1

Turning the Printer ON/OFF 1-11

1

1

Press " " of the power switch on the printer.

OFF

ON

IMPORTANT

While " " of the power switch located on the right side of the printer is pressed, the power consumption is 0 W.

1-12 Turning the Printer ON/OFF

Connecting to a Computer

This section describes how to connect the printer to a computer.

As this printer is equipped with a USB connector, you can use a USB cable to connect to a computer. By installing an optional network board, the printer can be connected directly to the network using a LAN cable.

Using a USB Cable

Connect the printer with a USB cable to the computer in which a USB port is equipped.

WARNING

When unplugging the USB cable when the power is turned ON, do not touch the metal part of the connector, as this may result in electrical shock.

IMPORTANT

• You can connect or disconnect the USB cable even while the power of the computer or printer is ON. However, do not connect or disconnect the USB cable in the following situations, as this may result in a computer or printer error:

- While the computer operating system (Windows) is starting up immediately after the computer is turned on

- While printing

• If you connect or disconnect the USB cable while the power of the computer and printer are turned ON, after disconnecting the USB cable, wait for 5 seconds or longer before connecting it again. If you connect the USB cable immediately after disconnecting it, this may result in a computer or printer error.

• This printer performs two-way communication while printing. If the printer is connected with a print server, a USB-hub switching device or others that require one-way communication, it may result in printer error.

NOTE

• The appropriate USB interface differs depending on the operation system of the connected computer as follows. For more details, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

- Windows 98/Me: USB Full-Speed (USB1.1 equivalent)

- Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: USB 2.0 Hi-Speed/USB Full-Speed (USB1.1 equivalent)

• When you connect this printer to a computer with a USB cable, use a computer with manufacturer's guarantee of USB proper operation.

• This printer does not come with a USB cable. Have the appropriate one available for your computer.

Connecting to a Computer 1-13

1

1

1

Connect the B-type (square) end of the USB cable to the USB connector on the rear side of the printer.

2

Connect the A-type (flat) end of the USB cable to the USB port on the computer.

NOTE

• If a Wizard appears after connecting the USB cable by the Plug and Play automatic setup, install the software for this printer using either one of the following

procedures. For more details, see "Installing the CAPT Software," on p. 3-4.

- Click [Cancel] and install the software from CD-ROM Setup.

- Install using Plug and Play.

• If you are not sure about the USB cable that is supported by your computer, contact the store where you purchased the computer.

1-14 Connecting to a Computer

Using a LAN Cable

If the optional network board (NB-C1) is installed, the printer can be connected to the network using a Category 5 twisted pair cable. Have a cable or hub available as needed.

NOTE

For details on the procedure for installing the network board, see "Network Board," on p.

6-38.

• To use this printer on a network, the network setting is required, and the printer is required to be installed as a network printer. For details on these settings, see "Network

Guide".

Network Environment

The optional network board supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connection.

• When connecting to a 10BASE-T Ethernet network

Computer without 10Base-T

Connector

Computer with 10Base-T

Connector

1

10Base-T Cable

10Base-T Network Board

10Base-T Hub LAN Connector

• When connecting to a 100BASE-TX Ethernet network

Computer without 100Base-TX

Connector

Computer with 100Base-TX

Connector

100Base-TX Network Board

100Base-TX

Cable

100Base-TX Hub LAN Connector

IMPORTANT

• The network board for this printer cannot be connected to networks other than those listed above.

• Make sure that there is a free port on the hub to which the printer will be connected. An additional hub must be installed if there is no free port.

Connecting to a Computer 1-15

1

NOTE

When connecting to the 100BASE-TX Ethernet network, all the devices to be connected to LAN, such as hub, LAN cable, and network board for computer, must support

100BASE-TX. For more details, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

1

Connect the LAN cable to the LAN connector of the network board.

Connect a LAN cable that is compatible with the LAN connector of the network board according to the network.

2

Connect the other end of the LAN cable to the hub.

1-16 Connecting to a Computer

Loading and Delivering Paper

2

CHAPTER

This chapter describes the types of paper that can be used with this printer, and how to load and deliver paper.

Paper Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Usable Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2

Printable Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6

Unusable Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

Storing Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

Storing Printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9

Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Paper Source Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Paper Capacity for Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

Selecting a Paper Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Paper Delivery Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Output Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Paper Capacity for Paper Delivery Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Printing from a Paper Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Loading Paper in a Paper Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Changing the Size of Paper in a Paper Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

Setting Up the Printer Driver and Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53

Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

Printing Paper (Other than Envelopes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58

Printing Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67

2-sided Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76

Automatic 2-sided Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77

Loading Paper When Performing Automatic 2-sided Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-80

Performing 2-sided Printing Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-83

2-1

2

Paper Requirements

Usable Paper

To ensure optimum performance, use only paper that falls within the specifications in the following lists. Inappropriate paper may result in deterioration in print quality or paper jams.

IMPORTANT

• Print speed may drop depending on the settings for the paper size, paper type, and print copies.

- Envelope: Approximately 6 ppm

• When continuously printing the paper of 279.4 mm wide (Letter size) or less, the safety function that prevents damages caused by heat may slow the print speed down in stages.

(It may be as slow as approximately 3 ppm.)

2-2 Paper Requirements

Paper Size

The following shows the paper sizes that can be used with this printer. The mark indicates that the paper is available for the 1-sided printing and automatic 2-sided printing using the optional duplex unit; the O mark indicates that the paper is available for only 1-sided printing; and the X mark indicates that the printing cannot be performed.

Paper Size

Multi-purpose

Tray

Cassette 1

Paper Source

Cassette 2

(Optional)

Cassette 3

(Optional)

Cassette 4

(Optional)

A 5 * 1

B 5 * 1

A 4 * 1

B 4 * 2

A 3 * 2

L e t t e r * 1

E xe c u t i ve * 1

L e g a l * 2

L e d g e r * 2

C u s t o m Pa p e r S i ze *

W i d t h : 7 6 . 2 - 2 9 7 . 0 m m

2

H e i g h t : 1 2 7 . 0 - 4 3 1 . 8 m m

Envelope * 2

Envelope DL 110.0 mm x 220.0 mm

Envelope COM10 105.0 mm x 241.0 mm

Envelope C5 162.0 mm x 229.0 mm

Envelope Monarch 98.0 mm x 191.0 mm

Envelope B5 176.0 mm x 250.0 mm

O

O

O

O

O

O

* 1 Paper can be loaded only in landscape orientation.

* 2 Paper can be loaded only in portrait orientation.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Paper Type

The following shows the paper types that can be used with this printer. The mark indicates that the paper is available for the 1-sided printing and automatic 2-sided printing using the optional duplex unit; the O mark indicates that the paper is available for only 1-sided printing; and the X mark indicates that the printing cannot be performed.

Paper Type

Plain paper

(64 - 80 g/m 2 )

81 - 90 g/m 2

Heavy paper

91 - 105 g/m 2

106 - 128 g/m 2

Printer Driver

Setting

Paper Source

Multi-purpose

Tray

Cassette 1

Cassette 2

(Optional)

Cassette 3

(Optional)

Cassette 4

(Optional)

[Plain Paper]

[Plain Paper L] * 1

* 2

[Heavy Paper L]

[Heavy Paper]

O

O

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

2

Paper Requirements 2-3

2

Paper Type

Transparency

Label

Envelope

Printer Driver

Setting

[Transparencies]

[Heavy Paper]

* 3

Paper Source

Multi-purpose

Tray

Cassette 1

Cassette 2

(Optional)

Cassette 3

(Optional)

Cassette 4

(Optional)

O

O

O

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

*1 Select when paper is curled by selecting [Plain Paper].

*2 Select [Heavy Paper L] when performing 1-sided printing from the multi-purpose tray. When printing from a cassette or performing 2-sided printing, perform the following settings: a Select [Plain Paper] for [Paper Type] in the [Paper Source] sheet.

b Click the [Finishing Details] button in the [Finishing] sheet and the [Advanced Settings] button in the [Finishing

Details] dialog box, and then, select [Mode 4] for [Fixing Mode] in the [Advanced Settings] dialog box.

*3 The printer automatically applies the appropriate print mode to each envelope type by specifying [Output Size] in the

[Page Setup] sheet.

Plain Paper

This printer can print plain paper that is 76.2 to 297.0 mm wide, 127.0 to 431.8 mm long, and that weighs between 64 and 80 g/m 2 , including the standard size paper sizes: A3, B4,

A4, B5, A5, Ledger, Legal, Letter, and Executive.

Standard paper can be loaded in the paper cassettes and multi-purpose tray. Automatic

2-sided printing can be performed on paper of A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Ledger, Letter, Legal, and Executive sizes. Custom paper can be loaded in the multi-purpose tray.

Heavy Paper

This printer can print heavy paper that is 76.2 to 297.0 mm wide, 127.0 to 431.8 mm long, and that weighs between 81 and 128 g/m 2 , including the standard size paper sizes: A3,

B4, A4, B5, A5, Ledger, Legal, Letter, and Executive. Heavy paper that weighs between

81 - 90 g/m 2 can be loaded in the paper cassettes and multi-purpose tray. Heavy paper that weighs between 91 - 128 g/m 2 can be loaded only in the multi-purpose tray.

IMPORTANT

When printing heavy paper of A3 size that weighs between 105 and 128 g/m 2 , take out one piece at a time each time it is delivered.

Transparency

This printer can print A4 and Letter size transparencies. Load transparencies in the multi-purpose tray.

IMPORTANT

Thoroughly fan the transparencies before loading them as they may stick to each other.

Label

This printer can print A4 and Letter size labels. After checking which is the face of the label, load them with the printing side facing up in the multi-purpose tray.

2-4 Paper Requirements

IMPORTANT

• Do not use the labels in the following conditions. Using inappropriate labels may result in paper jams that are difficult to clear or may result in damage to the printer.

- Peeled labels or partly used labels

- Coated labels that are easily peeled off from the backing sheet

- Labels with uneven adhesive

• When printing labels, take out one piece at a time each time it is delivered.

Envelope

This printer can print Envelope DL, Envelope COM10, Envelope C5, Envelope Monarch, and Envelope B5. Load the envelopes with the address side (non-glued side) facing up in the multi-purpose tray.

IMPORTANT

• The printable envelope types are shown below:

Envelope DL

110.0 mm x 220.0 mm

(4.33 in. x 8.66 in.)

Envelope Monarch

98.0 mm x 191.0 mm

(3.86 in. x 7.52 in.)

Envelope B5

176.0 mm x 250.0 mm

(6.93 in. x 9.84 in.)

2

Envelope COM10

105.0 mm x 241.0 mm

(4.13 in. x 9.49 in.)

Envelope C5

162.0 mm x 229.0 mm

(6.38 in. x 9.02 in.)

*Envelopes (Envelope DL, Envelope COM10, Envelope Monarch, Envelope C5)

with a flap on the short edge cannot be used.

• Do not use the following types of envelopes. Using inappropriate envelopes may result in paper jams that are difficult to clear or may result in damage to the printer.

- Envelopes with fasteners or snaps

- Envelopes with address windows

- Envelopes with adhesive on the surface

- Wrinkled or creased envelopes

- Poorly manufactured envelopes in which the glued parts are uneven

- Irregularly-shaped envelopes

• Before loading the envelopes, flatten the stack of envelopes to release any remaining air, and press the fold lines along the edges tight.

Do not print on the reverse side (glued side) of envelopes.

Printing speed drops when printing on envelops.

NOTE

When printing envelopes, they may be creased.

Paper Requirements 2-5

2

Abbreviations of Paper Sizes

The following shows the abbreviations of paper sizes that are marked on the paper cassette and paper size dial:

Paper Size

Ledger

Legal

Letter

Executive

Marks on Paper Cassette and Paper Size Dial

11 X 17

LGL

LTR

EXEC

IMPORTANT

Although the marks "A4R" and "LTR-R" are indicated on the paper cassettes of the printer (paper guide) and paper feeders and on the paper size dials, this printer cannot print on paper at sizes of A4R and Letter-R. Paper of A4 and Letter sizes can be loaded only in landscape orientation.

Printable Area

The following shows the printable area of this printer:

Plain Paper/Heavy Paper/Transparency/Label

The areas within 5 mm from all sides of paper cannot be printed on.

5 mm 5 mm

5 mm

5 mm

2-6 Paper Requirements

Envelope

Printable up to 10 mm from the edges of an envelope.

You may have to change the printable area before printing, depending the application you use.

(Sample: Envelope COM 10)

10 mm

241 mm

(9.49 in.

) 10 mm

10 mm

105 mm

(4.13 in.

)

10 mm

2

Unusable Paper

To avoid problems such as paper jams and other malfunctions, the following types of paper should never be used:

IMPORTANT

• Paper that jams easily

- Paper that is too thick or too thin

- Irregularly-shaped paper

- Wet or moist paper

- Torn or damaged paper

- Rough, extremely smooth, or glossy paper

- Paper with binding holes or perforations

- Curled or creased paper

- Specially coated paper (coated paper for ink jet printers, etc.)

- Labels with backing sheet that is easily peeled off

- Paper that has been already printed by a copy machine or another laser printer (The reverse side of the paper is also unusable. Using the multi-purpose tray, however, you can perform 2-sided printing manually on the back of previously printed paper. You cannot print on the printed side again.)

- Paper with jagged edges

- Wrinkled paper

- Paper with the corners folded

• Paper that changes its quality at a high temperature

- Paper that contains ink that melts, burns, evaporates or emits harmful gases with the heat (approx. 165 °C or 329 °F) of the fixing unit

- Heat-sensitive paper

- Treated color paper

- Specially coated paper (coated paper for ink jet printers, etc.)

- Paper with adhesive on the surface

Paper Requirements 2-7

2

• Paper that causes printer malfunctions or damages the printer

- Carbon paper

- Paper with staples, clips, ribbons or tapes

- Paper that has been already printed by a copy machine or another laser printer (The reverse side of the paper is also unusable. Using the multi-purpose tray, however, you can perform 2-sided printing manually on the back of previously printed paper. You cannot print on the printed side again.)

• Paper that is difficult for the toner to fix onto

- Paper with rough surfaces

- Specially coated paper (coated paper for ink jet printers, etc.)

- Paper containing thick fibers

Storing Paper

The quality of paper may deteriorate if it is stored improperly even when the paper meets the normal specifications. Inferior paper may cause misfeeds, paper jams, or deterioration in print quality.

Observe the following guidelines for storing and handling paper:

IMPORTANT

• Store paper away from moisture since paper quality deteriorates in a moist environment.

• Paper wrappers help avoiding moisture and dryness. Keep paper in the wrapper until it is ready to be used. Store all unused paper in a wrapper.

• Store paper on a flat surface.

• Do not store paper on the floor where water and moisture can accumulate.

• Avoid physical damage to stored paper.

• Do not store paper vertically or store too many stacks of paper in one pile.

• Avoid direct sunlight and a humid or dry place when storing paper.

• If the paper storage room and work area differ from each other significantly in temperature or humidity, keep packed paper stack in the work area for at least one day prior to printing so that it can adapt to the new environment. When paper is moved to a location where the temperature or humidity differs significantly, the paper may curl or become creased.

2-8 Paper Requirements

Storing Printouts

When handling or storing printouts printed by this printer, be careful of the following points:

IMPORTANT

• Avoid storing printouts with PVC materials such as clear folders. Toner may melt and stick to the PVC material.

• Use insoluble adhesive when gluing printouts. Toner may melt when insoluble adhesive is used. Before using the adhesive, test it with paper that is no longer required.

Confirm that the printouts are completely dry before placing one over another. Toner may melt if they are placed together half-dried.

• Store paper on a flat surface. Toner may peel when they are folded or creased.

Avoid storing printouts at high temperatures. Otherwise toner may melt and blot.

Put printouts in a binder when storing them for a long period of time (two years or longer).

(Printouts may discolor when they are stored for a long period of time.)

2

Paper Requirements 2-9

2

Paper Source

This printer is supplied with two paper sources: the paper cassette (Cassette 1) and multi-purpose tray. By installing optional paper feeders (Cassette 2, Cassette 3, and Cassette 4), up to 5 paper sources can be used.

NOTE

Up to 3 paper feeders can be installed as shown in the figure:

* Be sure to install the 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit

PF-66 at the top among the optional paper feeder units. More than one 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit

PF-66 cannot be installed. Also, it cannot be installed under the 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-

66E.

* The 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66E cannot be installed on the 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-

66.

250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66

250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66E

Paper Source Type

This printer has the following paper sources:

Paper Source/Capacity

Multi-purpose Tray 100 sheets (64 g/m 2 )

Cassette 1

Cassette 2

Cassette 3

Cassette 4

250 sheets (64 g/m 2 )

250 sheets (64 g/m 2 )

250 sheets (64 g/m 2 )

250 sheets (64 g/m 2 )

2-10 Paper Source

Maximum Capacity

1100 sheets (64 g/m 2 )

Multi-purpose Tray

Cassette 1

Cassette 2 (Optional)

Cassette 3 (Optional)

Cassette 4 (Optional)

Paper Capacity for Paper Source

Paper Type

Plain Paper

(64 g/m 2 )

Heavy Paper

(90 g/m 2 )

Heavy Paper

(128 g/m 2 )

Transparency

Label

Envelope

Multi-purpose

Tray

Approx.

100 sheets

Approx.

50 sheets

Approx.

50 sheets

Approx.

50 sheets

Approx.

50 sheets

Approx.

10 sheets

Paper Source

Cassette 1

Cassette 2

(Optional)

Approx.

250 sheets

Approx.

150 sheets

Approx.

250 sheets

Approx.

150 sheets

Cassette 3

(Optional)

Approx.

250 sheets

Approx.

150 sheets

Cassette 4

(Optional)

Approx.

250 sheets

Approx.

150 sheets

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

2

Paper Source 2-11

2

Selecting a Paper Source

A paper source can be selected in the [Paper Source] sheet in the printer driver.

1

Display the [Paper Source] sheet and specify the paper source.

To display the [Paper Source] sheet in the printer driver, see "Specifying the

Printing Preferences," on p. 4-9.

2-12 Paper Source

2

Specify the following items as needed:

Setting

Paper

Selection

Setting Value

Same Paper for All Pages

Different for First, Others, and

Last

Different for First, Second,

Others, and Last

Different for Cover and

Others* 1

Paper can be selected for each page, such as for printing the front cover on a different type of paper.

Transparency Interleaving

Allows you to place paper sheets between transparencies.

Paper Source

First Page

Second Page

Cover* 1

Other Pages

Auto

Multi-purpose Tray

Cassette 1

Cassette 2* 2

Cassette 3* 2

Cassette 4* 2

Last Page

Interleaf

Sheet

Paper Type

Auto

Cassette 1

Cassette 2* 2

Cassette 3* 2

Cassette 4* 2

Plain Paper

Plain Paper L

Heavy Paper

Heavy Paper L

Transparency

Description

Feeds all the pages from the same paper source. If [Auto] is selected for [Paper Source] and

[Continue Printing with the

Multi-purpose Tray] is checked, the printer automatically switches the paper source to the multi-purpose tray when

Cassette 1, 2, 3, or 4 runs out of paper during printing.

Select a paper source. Options to be specified differ depending on the setting for [Paper

Selection].

Specify the type of paper.

(See p. 2-3)

2

Paper Source 2-13

2

Setting

Pause when

Printing from the

Multi-purpose

Tray

Continue

Printing with the

Multi-purpose

Tray

Setting Value

-

-

Description

Specify whether the printer should pause a job and display a message or continue the job when feeding paper from the multi-purpose tray.

Specify whether the printer should switch the paper source to the multi-purpose tray automatically when a cassette has run out of paper during a job and the paper specified in

[Output Size] in the [Page

Setup] sheet is not loaded in any other cassette.

* 1 This option can be specified only when the optional duplex unit is installed and [Booklet Printing] is selected for [Print Style] in the [Finishing] sheet.

* 2 This option can be specified only when the optional paper feeder is installed.

3

Confirm the settings, then click [OK].

2-14 Paper Source

Paper Delivery Area

Output Tray

Printouts are delivered to the output tray on top of the main unit with the printing side facing down. Printouts are delivered in order of page.

2

IMPORTANT

• When printing heavy paper and labels of A3 size that weighs between 105 and 128 g/m 2 , take out one piece at a time each time it is delivered.

• During 2-sided printing, do not touch the paper until it is delivered onto the output tray completely. During 2-sided printing, the paper is first delivered partially after the front side is printed, and then it is fed again to be printed on the reverse side.

NOTE

Up to approximately 250 sheets of plain paper (64 g/m 2 ) for 1-sided printing or 200 sheets for 2-sided printing can be loaded in the output tray.

Paper Delivery Area 2-15

When delivering paper as large as A3, B4, Ledger, or Legal size paper

Pull out the auxiliary tray so that paper will not hang over the edge when delivering long-size paper such as A3, B4, Ledger, or Legal size paper.

2

Paper Capacity for Paper Delivery Area

The following shows the number of sheets that can be delivered onto the output tray:

Paper Type

Plain Paper (Ex. 64 g/m 2 )

Heavy Paper (Ex. 90 g/m 2 )

Heavy Paper (Ex. 128 g/m 2 )

Transparency

Label

Envelope

Output Tray* 1

Approx. 250 sheets (1-sided Printing)/

Approx. 200 sheets (2-sided Printing)

Approx. 150 sheets

Approx. 150 sheets *2

Approx. 100 sheets

Approx. 1 sheet

Approx. 20 sheets

*1 Actual paper capacity varies depending on the installation environment or paper type.

*2 The paper capacity for A3 size heavy paper that weighs between 105 and 128 g/m

2 is 1 sheet.

2-16 Paper Delivery Area

Printing from a Paper Cassette

Up to approximately 250 sheets of plain, standard size paper (64 g/m 2 ) can be loaded in a paper cassette. When the paper source has run out of paper, a message indicating there is no paper appears on the Printer Status Window, and the Paper indicator (red) blinks. In this case, refill paper.

This printer is supplied with a paper cassette (Cassette 1). By installing the optional paper feeders, Cassette 2, 3, and 4 are added.

Portrait orientation Landscape orientation

2

Ex. A3 Ex. A4

· Paper that can be loaded in portrait orientation:

A3, B4, Legal, Ledger

· Paper that can be loaded in landscape orientation:

A4, B5, A5, Letter, Executive

IMPORTANT

• Although the marks "A4R" and "LTR-R" are indicated on the paper cassettes of the printer (paper guide) and paper feeders and on the paper size dials, this printer cannot print on paper at sizes of A4R and Letter-R. Paper of A4 and Letter sizes can be loaded only in landscape orientation.

• When printing heavy paper (81 - 90 g/m 2 ) from a cassette, perform the following settings: a Select [Plain Paper] for [Paper Type] in the [Paper Source] sheet.

b Click the [Finishing Details] button in the [Finishing] sheet and the [Advanced Settings] button in the [Finishing Details] dialog box, and then, select [Mode 4] for [Fixing Mode] in the [Advanced Settings] dialog box.

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-17

2

Loading Paper in a Paper Cassette

Different sizes of paper can be loaded in Cassette 1 supplied with the printer and in

Cassette 2, 3, and 4 that are available when the optional paper feeders are installed. Then, you can switch among these paper sources automatically.

Since the paper loading procedures for Cassette 1 and for the optional Cassette 2 to 4 differ, load paper properly using the following procedure.

IMPORTANT

• Follow the instructions below to prevent your printer from paper jams.

- Do not load media other than plain paper (64 - 80 g/m 2 ) and heavy paper (81 - 90 g/m 2 ), such as transparencies, labels, and envelopes. For more details on the paper that can

be loaded, see "Paper Requirements," on p. 2-2.

- Do not load paper with jagged edges, creased, or extremely curled paper.

- Refill the cassette when paper runs out. If the cassette is refilled when paper still remains in the cassette, it may result in misfeeds.

- Up to approximately 250 sheets of plain paper (64 g/m 2 ) or 150 sheets of heavy paper

(90 g/m 2 ) can be loaded in the paper cassette. Be sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit marks on the paper guides. If the paper stack exceeds the load limit marks, this may result in misfeeds.

• Do not touch the black rubber pad in the paper cassette. If you touch it, this may result in misfeeds.

- Cassette 1

Rubber pad

2-18 Printing from a Paper Cassette

- Cassette 2, 3, and 4

Rubber pad

NOTE

• The installation procedure for the optional 250-sheet universal cassette UC-66A is the same as that for Cassette 1.

• The installation procedure for the optional 250-sheet universal cassette UC-66B is the same as that for Cassette 2, 3, and 4.

Loading Paper in Cassette 1

NOTE

If you want to change the paper size, see "Changing the Size of Paper in a Paper

Cassette," on p. 2-32.

1

Pull out the paper cassette.

If it is difficult to pull out the paper cassette, lift it slightly, and then pull it out horizontally.

2

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-19

2

CAUTION

Be sure to take the paper cassette out of the printer before loading paper.

If paper is loaded while the paper cassette is partially pulled out, the paper cassette may drop or the printer may become damaged resulting in personal injuries.

2

Remove the cassette cover.

3

Push down the plate of the paper cassette to lock it.

2-20 Printing from a Paper Cassette

CAUTION

Do not touch the lock release levers located on each side of the paper cassette when the plate of the paper cassette is locked. The plate may snap forcefully if the lock is released and may result in personal injuries.

Lock release lever Lock release lever

2

4

Load paper so that the edge of the paper is aligned with the front paper guide.

CAUTION

When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the paper.

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-21

IMPORTANT

Double-feeding may occur frequently if the edges of the paper stack are not aligned properly. In this case, align the edges of the stack on a hard, flat surface.

2

NOTE

To print letterhead paper or paper printed with a logo, load the paper in the proper orientation according to the following instructions:

- When loading paper in landscape orientation, as when loading A4, B5, A5, Letter, or Executive size paper, load the paper so that the printing side is facing up and the top edge is toward the right of the printer when viewed from the front.

:Feeding direction

ABC

- When loading paper in portrait orientation, as when loading A3, B4, Ledger, or

Legal size paper, load the paper so that the printing side is facing up and the top edge is toward the back of the printer when viewed from the front.

:Feeding direction

ABC

2-22 Printing from a Paper Cassette

5

Press down both sides of the paper stack so that it is loaded under the hooks on the side paper guides.

Make sure that there is sufficient space between the hooks and paper stack.

Take out some paper when there is no space.

Hooks Hooks

Load limit mark

Load limit mark

2

IMPORTANT

Up to approximately 250 sheets of plain paper (64 g/m 2 ) or 150 sheets of heavy paper (90 g/m 2 ) can be loaded in the paper cassette. Be sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit marks on the paper guides. If the paper stack exceeds the load limit marks, this may result in misfeeds.

6

Align the paper with the left paper guide.

Left paper guide

IMPORTANT

Be sure to align the paper with the left paper guide. If not, this may result in poor print quality.

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-23

7

Set the cassette cover as shown in the figure.

2

Paper cassette

Cassette cover

Make sure the cassette cover is flush against the front side of the paper cassette.

IMPORTANT

Set the cassette cover properly. If the paper cassette is set when the cassette cover is not set properly, you may not be able to pull out the paper cassette.

NOTE

If the paper cassette is extended, set the cassette cover to prevent dust getting into the cassette. The paper cassette can be used without the cassette cover if it is not extended. In this case, keep the cassette cover.

2-24

8

Set the paper cassette in the printer.

Set the paper cassette referring to the following figure.

If you cannot insert the paper cassette smoothly, check if the cassette cover is set properly. If the paper cassette is set when the cassette cover is not set properly, you may not be able to pull out the paper cassette.

Printing from a Paper Cassette

• If the paper cassette is not extended, push the paper cassette into the printer firmly until the front side of the cassette is flush with the front surface of the printer.

• If the paper cassette is extended, the front side of the cassette is not flush with the front surface of the printer. Push the paper cassette gently until it stops.

2

When a message indicating there is no paper appears in the Printer Status

Window and the Paper indicator (red) blinks, the printer resumes printing automatically.

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-25

2

NOTE

The printer looks as shown in the figure below when used with the paper cassettes of the main unit and the optional paper feeders extended.

2-26 Printing from a Paper Cassette

Loading Paper in Cassette 2, 3, or 4

NOTE

If you want to change the paper size, see "Changing the Size of Paper in Cassette 2, 3, or 4," on p. 2-45.

1

Pull out the paper cassette gently until it stops a , then lift up the front portion of the cassette to remove it b .

2 a b

CAUTION

Be sure to take the paper cassette out of the paper feeder before loading paper. If paper is loaded while the paper cassette is partially pulled out, the paper cassette may drop or the printer may become damaged resulting in personal injuries.

IMPORTANT

The paper cassette cannot be pulled out horizontally. If you try to pull it out forcefully, this may result in damage to the paper cassette.

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-27

2

2

Load the paper stack so that the rear edge is aligned with the paper guide.

CAUTION

When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the paper.

IMPORTANT

Double-feeding may occur frequently if the edges of the paper stack are not aligned properly. In this case, align the edges of the stack on a hard, flat surface.

2-28 Printing from a Paper Cassette

NOTE

To print letterhead paper or paper printed with a logo, load the paper in the proper orientation according to the following instructions:

- When loading paper in landscape orientation, as when loading A4, B5, A5, Letter, or Executive size paper, load the paper so that the printing side is facing down and the top edge is toward the right of the printer when viewed from the front.

:Feeding direction

2

- When loading paper in portrait orientation, as when loading A3, B4, Ledger, or

Legal size paper, load the paper so that the printing side is facing down and the top edge is toward the front of the printer when viewed from the front.

:Feeding direction

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-29

2

3

Press down the paper stack so that it is loaded under the hooks on the side paper guides.

Make sure that there is sufficient space between the hooks and paper stack.

Take out some paper when there is no space.

Hooks Hooks

Load limit mark

Load limit mark

IMPORTANT

Up to approximately 250 sheets of plain paper (64 g/m 2 ) or 150 sheets of heavy paper (90 g/m 2 ) can be loaded in the paper cassette. Be sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit marks on the paper guides. If the paper stack exceeds the load limit marks, this may result in misfeeds.

2-30 Printing from a Paper Cassette

4

Insert the paper cassette obliquely into the paper cassette as shown in the figure a , and then gently push it horizontally into the paper feeder b .

Push the paper cassette into the printer firmly until the front side of the cassette is flush with the front surface of the paper feeder.

2 a b

When a message indicating there is no paper appears in the Printer Status

Window and the Paper indicator (red) blinks, the printer resumes printing automatically.

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-31

NOTE

The printer looks as shown in the figure below when used with the paper cassettes of the main unit and the optional paper feeders extended.

2

Changing the Size of Paper in a Paper Cassette

The size of paper in the paper cassettes can be changed using the following procedure.

Paper sizes that can be loaded in the paper cassettes are A3, B4, A4, B5, A5,

Legal, Ledger, Letter, and Executive.

IMPORTANT

• Be sure to check if the paper size indicated on the paper guide and on the paper size dial matches that of the loaded paper. If they do not match, this may result in misfeeds or printer malfunction.

• Although the marks "A4R" and "LTR-R" are indicated on the paper cassettes of the printer (paper guide) and paper feeders and on the paper size dials, this printer cannot print on paper at sizes of A4R and Letter-R. Paper of A4 and Letter sizes can be loaded only in landscape orientation.

2-32 Printing from a Paper Cassette

Changing the Size of Paper in Cassette 1

1

Pull out the paper cassette.

If it is difficult to pull out the paper cassette, lift it slightly, and then pull it out horizontally.

2

CAUTION

Be sure to take the paper cassette out of the printer before loading paper.

If paper is loaded while the paper cassette is partially pulled out, the paper cassette may drop or the printer may become damaged resulting in personal injuries.

2

Remove the cassette cover.

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-33

3

Remove any paper that is left in the paper cassette.

2

4

Adjust the length of the paper cassette according to the size of the paper to be loaded.

When loading paper in landscape orientation, as when loading A4, B5, A5,

Letter, or Executive size paper, shorten the paper cassette.

When loading paper in portrait orientation, as when loading A3, B4, Ledger, or

Legal size paper, extend the paper cassette.

To adjust the length of the paper cassette, push up the lock release levers gently to release the lock, slide the paper cassette by holding the rear portion of the paper cassette, and then push down the lock release levers to lock the cassette.

Unlock Unlock

Lock Lock

2-34 Printing from a Paper Cassette

5

Push down the plate of the paper cassette to lock it.

CAUTION

Do not touch the lock release levers located on each side of the paper cassette when the plate of the paper cassette is locked. The plate may snap forcefully if the lock is released and may result in personal injuries.

Lock release lever Lock release lever

2

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-35

2

6

Tilt the paper guide in the front side of the paper guide backwards a , then remove it b .

a b

7

Insert the hooks of the paper guide into the holes for the size of the paper to be loaded a , tilt the guide forward to lock it b .

b a

2-36 Printing from a Paper Cassette

IMPORTANT

• Insert the hooks of the paper guide as shown in the figure so that the marked paper size is the size of the paper to be loaded. If the paper guide is set in a wrong position, this may result in misfeeds.

Letter A4

2

• Although the marks "A4R" and "LTR-R" are indicated, this printer cannot print paper at sizes of A4R and Letter-R. Paper of A4 and Letter sizes can be loaded only in landscape orientation.

8

Align the side paper guides with the size mark for the paper to be loaded.

The side paper guides move together.

Match this mark with the paper size.

IMPORTANT

Although the marks "A4R" and "LTR-R" are indicated, this printer cannot print paper at sizes of A4R and Letter-R. Paper of A4 and Letter sizes can be loaded only in landscape orientation.

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-37

2

9

Load paper so that the edge of the paper is aligned with the front paper guide.

CAUTION

When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the paper.

IMPORTANT

Double-feeding may occur frequently if the edges of the paper stack are not aligned properly. In this case, align the edges of the stack on a hard, flat surface.

2-38 Printing from a Paper Cassette

NOTE

To print letterhead paper or paper printed with a logo, load the paper in the proper orientation according to the following instructions:

- When loading paper in landscape orientation, as when loading A4, B5, A5, Letter, or Executive size paper, load the paper so that the printing side is facing up and the top edge is toward the right of the printer when viewed from the front.

:Feeding direction

ABC 2

- When loading paper in portrait orientation, as when loading A3, B4, Ledger, or

Legal size paper, load the paper so that the printing side is facing up and the top edge is toward the back of the printer when viewed from the front.

:Feeding direction

ABC

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-39

2

10

Press down both sides of the paper stack so that it is loaded under the hooks on the side paper guides.

Make sure that there is sufficient space between the hooks and paper stack.

Take out some paper when there is no space.

Hooks Hooks

Load limit mark

Load limit mark

IMPORTANT

Up to approximately 250 sheets of plain paper (64 g/m 2 ) or 150 sheets of heavy paper (90 g/m 2 ) can be loaded in the paper cassette. Be sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit marks on the paper guides. If the paper stack exceeds the load limit marks, this may result in misfeeds.

11

Align the paper with the left paper guide.

Left paper guide

IMPORTANT

Be sure to align the paper with the left paper guide. If not, this may result in poor print quality.

2-40 Printing from a Paper Cassette

12

Open the paper size cover.

13

Set the paper size dial to the size of the loaded paper.

The default is "A4".

2

IMPORTANT

• Make sure that the size of the loaded paper matches that indicated by the paper size dial before setting the paper cassette in the printer. If the size indicated by the paper size dial does not match, this may result in printer malfunction.

• Do not set the paper size dial to "-". This may result in printer malfunction.

• If you have set the paper size dial to "FREE", install the optional 250-sheet universal cassette UC-66F (a release date has not yet been set). Set the paper size dial to "FREE" when loading a custom paper size in the paper cassette. If the paper size dial is set to "FREE" when the 250-sheet universal cassette UC-66F that supports custom paper sizes is not installed, or if the paper size of the print data is different from that of the loaded paper, blank areas may appear on the printed paper, part of the images may be missing, or the inside the printer may become dirty.

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-41

14

Insert the paper size indicator for the size of the loaded paper into the paper size slot of the paper size cover.

2

15

Close the paper size cover.

2-42 Printing from a Paper Cassette

16

Set the cassette cover as shown in the figure.

Paper cassette

Cassette cover

Make sure the cassette cover is flush against the front side of the paper cassette.

IMPORTANT

Set the cassette cover properly. If the paper cassette is set when the cassette cover is not set properly, you may not be able to pull out the paper cassette.

NOTE

If the paper cassette is extended, set the cassette cover to prevent dust getting into the cassette. The paper cassette can be used without the cassette cover if it is not extended. In this case, keep the cassette cover.

2

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-43

2

17

Set the paper cassette in the printer.

Set the paper cassette referring to the following figure.

If you cannot insert the paper cassette smoothly, check if the cassette cover is set properly. If the paper cassette is set when the cassette cover is not set properly, you may not be able to pull out the paper cassette.

• If the paper cassette is not extended, push the paper cassette into the printer firmly until the front side of the cassette is flush with the front surface of the printer.

• If the paper cassette is extended, the front side of the cassette is not flush with the front surface of the printer. Push the paper cassette gently until it stops.

2-44 Printing from a Paper Cassette

NOTE

The printer looks as shown in the figure below when used with the paper cassettes of the main unit and the optional paper feeders extended.

Changing the Size of Paper in Cassette 2, 3, or 4

1

Pull out the paper cassette gently until it stops a , then lift up the front portion of the cassette to remove it b .

2 b a

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-45

2

CAUTION

Be sure to take the paper cassette out of the paper feeder before loading paper. If paper is loaded while the paper cassette is partially pulled out, the paper cassette may drop or the printer may become damaged resulting in personal injuries.

IMPORTANT

The paper cassette cannot be pulled out horizontally. If you try to pull it out forcefully, this may result in damage to the paper cassette.

2

Remove any paper that is left in the paper cassette.

2-46 Printing from a Paper Cassette

3

Adjust the length of the paper cassette according to the size of the paper to be loaded.

When loading paper in landscape orientation, as when loading A4, B5, A5,

Letter, or Executive size paper, shorten the paper cassette.

When loading paper in portrait orientation, as when loading A3, B4, Ledger, or

Legal size paper, extend the paper cassette.

To adjust the length of the paper cassette, push up the lock release levers gently to release the lock, slide the paper cassette by holding the rear portion of the paper cassette, and then push down the lock release levers to lock the cassette.

2

Unlock Unlock

Lock Lock

4

While holding the lock release lever of the rear paper guide, slide the guide to the size mark for the loaded paper.

If the paper size is indicated on the left, match this part with it.

If the paper size is indicated on the right, match this part with it.

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-47

2

IMPORTANT

Although the marks "A4R" and "LTR-R" are indicated, this printer cannot print paper at sizes of A4R and Letter-R. Paper of A4 and Letter sizes can be loaded only in landscape orientation.

5

While holding the lock release lever of the side paper guide, slide the guide to the size mark for the paper to be loaded.

The side paper guides move together.

Match this line with the paper size.

IMPORTANT

Although the mark "A4R" is indicated, this printer cannot print paper at sizes of

A4R and Letter-R. Paper of A4 and Letter sizes can be loaded only in landscape orientation.

6

Load the paper stack so that the rear edge is aligned with the paper guide.

2-48 Printing from a Paper Cassette

CAUTION

When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the paper.

IMPORTANT

Double-feeding may occur frequently if the edges of the paper stack are not aligned properly. In this case, align the edges of the stack on a hard, flat surface.

2

NOTE

To print letterhead paper or paper printed with a logo, load the paper in the proper orientation according to the following instructions:

- When loading paper in landscape orientation, as when loading A4, B5, A5, Letter, or Executive size paper, load the paper so that the printing side is facing down and the top edge is toward the right of the printer when viewed from the front.

:Feeding direction

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-49

- When loading paper in portrait orientation, as when loading A3, B4, Ledger, or

Legal size paper, load the paper so that the printing side is facing down and the top edge is toward the front of the printer when viewed from the front.

:Feeding direction

2

7

Press down the paper stack so that it is loaded under the hooks on the side paper guides.

Make sure that there is sufficient space between the hooks and paper stack.

Take out some paper when there is no space.

Hooks

Hooks

Load limit mark

Load limit mark

IMPORTANT

Up to approximately 250 sheets of plain paper (64 g/m 2 ) or 150 sheets of heavy paper (90 g/m 2 ) can be loaded in the paper cassette. Be sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit marks on the paper guides. If the paper stack exceeds the load limit marks, this may result in misfeeds.

2-50 Printing from a Paper Cassette

8

Set the paper size dial at the front of the paper feeder to the size of the loaded paper.

The default is "A4".

A4

2

IMPORTANT

• Make sure that the size of the loaded paper matches that indicated by the paper size dial before setting the paper cassette in the printer. If the size indicated by the paper size dial does not match, this may result in printer malfunction.

• Do not set the paper size dial to "-". This may result in printer malfunction.

• Although the marks "A4R" and "LTR-R" are indicated on the paper size dial, this printer cannot print paper at sizes of A4R and Letter-R. Paper of A4 and Letter sizes can be loaded only in landscape orientation.

9

Attach the label for the size of the loaded paper to the paper size indicator, and insert the guide into the paper size slot at the front of the paper cassette.

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-51

2

10

Insert the paper cassette obliquely into the paper cassette as shown in the figure a , and then gently push it horizontally into the paper feeder b .

Push the paper cassette into the printer firmly until the front side of the cassette is flush with the front surface of the paper feeder.

a b

2-52 Printing from a Paper Cassette

NOTE

The printer looks as shown in the figure below when used with the paper cassettes of the main unit and the optional paper feeders extended.

Setting Up the Printer Driver and Printing

Follow the procedure below to setup the printer driver:

1

Select [Print] from the [File] menu in the application. Select this printer for [Name] or [Printer Name], and then click

[Properties].

2

The Properties dialog box for the printer is displayed.

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-53

2

2

Display the [Page Setup] sheet, then from [Page Size], select the size of a document that you have created in the application.

3

From [Output Size], select the size of the loaded paper as needed.

Leave the setting at [Match Page Size] when the page size and the size of the paper loaded in the cassette are the same, since there is no need to change the setting.

IMPORTANT

If the settings for [Page Size] and [Output Size] are different, the printer produces an enlarged or reduced print automatically.

2-54 Printing from a Paper Cassette

4

Display the [Paper Source] sheet, then select [Paper Source].

Specify the same setting as the setting for [Paper Source], although the setting for [Paper Source] changes to ones such as [First Page] or [Other Pages] when other than [Same Paper for All Pages] is selected for [Paper Selection].

2

5

Select [Plain Paper] for [Paper Type].

IMPORTANT

When printing heavy paper (81 - 90 g/m 2 ) from a cassette, perform the following settings after selecting [Plain Paper] for [Paper Type]:

- Click the [Finishing Details] button in the [Finishing] sheet and the [Advanced

Settings] button in the [Finishing Details] dialog box, and then, select [Mode 4] for

[Fixing Mode] in the [Advanced Settings] dialog box.

Printing from a Paper Cassette 2-55

2

NOTE

If paper curls excessively when printed with [Plain Paper] selected, select [Plain

Paper L].

6

Click [OK] to close the Properties dialog box.

7

Click [OK] to start printing.

2-56 Printing from a Paper Cassette

Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray

Approximately 100 sheets of plain paper (64 g/m 2 ) that is 76.2 to 297.0 mm wide and

127.0 to 431.8 mm long can be loaded in the multi-purpose tray. Paper that cannot be loaded in a paper cassette such as transparencies, labels, and envelopes can be loaded in the multi-purpose tray.

The paper loading procedure varies depending on the paper type. Refer to the respective procedures for each paper type.

Plain Paper, Heavy Paper, Transparency, Label (See "Printing Paper (Other than

Envelopes)," on p. 2-58)

Envelope (See "Printing Envelopes," on p. 2-67)

IMPORTANT

Do not put anything other than the printing paper on the multi-purpose tray. Also, do not press on top of or apply excessive force to the multi-purposes tray. This may result in damage to the multi-purpose tray.

NOTE

Before closing the multi-purpose tray, remove any loaded paper.

Keep the multi-purpose tray closed when it is not used.

2

Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray 2-57

2

Printing Paper (Other than Envelopes)

Follow the procedure below to load plain paper, heavy paper, transparencies, or labels in the multi-purpose tray.

IMPORTANT

• Thoroughly fan the transparencies before loading them as they may stick to each other.

• Do not use the labels in the following conditions. Using inappropriate labels may result in paper jams that are difficult to clear or may result in damage to the printer.

- Peeled labels or partly used labels

- Coated labels that are easily peeled off from the backing sheet

- Labels with uneven adhesive

1

Open the multi-purpose tray.

Holding the grip at the center of the printer, open the multi-purpose tray.

2

Raise the paper retaining lever.

2-58 Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray

3

Spread the paper guide a little wider than the actual paper width.

EXEC

11x17

LTR

LGL A5 B4

B5

A3

A4

2

4

Before loading transparencies or labels, fan them in small batches and align the edges.

T h o r o u g h l y fa n i n s m a l l b a t c h e s Tap the edges on a flat surface a few times

CAUTION

When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the paper.

IMPORTANT

• Be sure to fan the transparencies or labels thoroughly before loading them. If they are not fanned enough, this may result in double-feeding or paper jams.

• When fanning or aligning the transparencies, try to hold the edges to avoid touching the printing surface.

• Take care not to mark or stain the printing surface of the transparencies with fingerprints, dust, or oil. This may result in poor print quality.

Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray 2-59

2

5

Gently load the stack of paper with the printing side facing up until it touches the back of the tray.

Load limit mark

CAUTION

When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the paper.

IMPORTANT

• The following shows the paper capacity for the multi-purpose tray. Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit marks.

- Plain paper: Approx. 100 sheets (64 g/m 2 )

- Heavy paper: Approx. 50 sheets (128 g/m 2 )

- Transparency: Approx. 50 sheets

- Label: Approx. 50 sheets

• Load the paper so that it is straight.

• If the rear edge of the paper stack is not properly aligned, it may result in misfeeds or paper jams.

• If the paper is curled or folded at corners, flatten it before loading it in the printer.

• Double-feeding may occur frequently if the edges of the paper stack are not aligned properly. In this case, align the edges of the stack on a hard, flat surface.

2-60 Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray

NOTE

To print letterhead paper or paper printed with a logo, load the paper in the proper orientation according to the following instructions:

- When loading paper in landscape orientation, as when loading A4, B5, A5, Letter, or Executive size paper, load the paper so that the printing side is facing up and the top edge is toward the right of the printer when viewed from the front.

:Feeding direction

2

ABC

- When loading paper in portrait orientation, as when loading A3, B4, Ledger, or

Legal size paper, load the paper so that the printing side is facing up and the top edge is toward the back of the printer when viewed from the front.

:Feeding direction

ABC

Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray 2-61

6

Align the paper guide with both sides of the stack.

2

IMPORTANT

• Be sure to align the paper guide with the width of the paper. If the paper guide is too loose or too tight, this may result in misfeeds or paper jams.

• Do not touch the paper in the multi-purpose tray or pull it out during printing. This may result in an error in the printer.

2-62 Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray

7

Lower the paper retaining lever.

Proceed to printer driver settings.

8

Select [Print] from the [File] menu in the application. Select this printer for [Name] or [Printer Name], and then click

[Properties].

2

The Properties dialog box for the printer is displayed.

Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray 2-63

2

9

Display the [Page Setup] sheet, then from [Page Size], select the size of a document that you have created in the application.

10

From [Output Size], select the size of the loaded paper as needed.

Select [A4] or [Letter] for printing transparencies or labels.

Leave the setting at [Match Page Size] when the page size and the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray are the same, since there is no need to change the setting.

2-64

IMPORTANT

If the settings for [Page Size] and [Output Size] are different, the printer produces an enlarged or reduced print automatically.

Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray

11

Display the [Paper Source] sheet and select [Multi-purpose

Tray] for [Paper Source].

Specify the same setting as the setting for [Paper Source], although the setting for [Paper Source] changes to ones such as [First Page] or [Other Pages] when other than [Same Paper for All Pages] is selected for [Paper Selection].

2

NOTE

When [Transparency Interleaving] is selected for [Paper Selection], you can interleave paper sheets between the transparencies.

12

Select the paper type specified in [Paper Type].

Select [Plain Paper] for plain paper, [Heavy Paper L] for heavy paper (81 - 105 g/ m 2 ), [Heavy Paper] for heavy paper (106 - 128 g/m 2 ) or labels, and

[Transparencies] for transparencies.

Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray 2-65

13

Click [OK] to close the Properties dialog box.

2

14

Click [OK] to start printing.

2-66 Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray

Printing Envelopes

Envelopes at sizes of DL, COM10, C5, Monarch, and B5 can be loaded in the multi-purpose tray. Follow the procedure below to load envelopes in the multi-purpose tray.

IMPORTANT

• The printable envelope types are shown below:

Envelope DL

110.0 mm x 220.0 mm

(4.33 in. x 8.66 in.)

Envelope Monarch

98.0 mm x 191.0 mm

(3.86 in. x 7.52 in.)

Envelope B5

176.0 mm x 250.0 mm

(6.93 in. x 9.84 in.)

2

Envelope COM10

105.0 mm x 241.0 mm

(4.13 in. x 9.49 in.)

Envelope C5

162.0 mm x 229.0 mm

(6.38 in. x 9.02 in.)

*Envelopes (Envelope DL, Envelope COM10, Envelope Monarch, Envelope C5)

with a flap on the short edge cannot be used.

• Do not use the following types of envelopes. Using inappropriate envelopes may result in paper jams that are difficult to clear or may result in damage to the printer.

- Envelopes with fasteners or snaps

- Envelopes with address windows

- Envelopes with adhesive on the surface

- Wrinkled or creased envelopes

- Poorly manufactured envelopes in which the glued parts are uneven

- Irregularly-shaped envelopes

• Before loading the envelopes, flatten the stack of envelopes to release any remaining air, and press the fold lines along the edges tight.

Do not print on the reverse side (glued side) of envelopes.

Printing speed drops when printing on envelops.

NOTE

When printing envelopes, they may be creased.

Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray 2-67

2

1

Open the multi-purpose tray.

Holding the grip at the center of the printer, open the multi-purpose tray.

2

Raise the paper retaining lever.

2-68 Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray

3

Spread the paper guide a little wider than the actual envelope width.

4

Place the stack of envelopes on a flat surface, flatten them to release any remaining air, and be sure that the edges are pressed tightly.

2

CAUTION

When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the paper.

Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray 2-69

5

Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and flatten curls as shown in the figure.

2

6

Align the edges of the envelopes on a flat surface.

7

Gently load the stack of envelopes with the address side facing up until it touches the back of the multi-purpose tray as shown in the figure.

Load limit mark

2-70 Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray

IMPORTANT

• Up to 10 sheets of envelopes can be loaded in the multi-purpose tray. Make sure that the envelope stack does not exceed the load limit marks.

You cannot print on the reverse side (glued side) of envelopes.

When loading envelopes at sizes of DL, COM10, C5, or Monarch, load them so that the flap is toward the left of the printer when viewed from the front.

2

• When loading envelopes at size of Envelope B5, leave the flaps open and load them so that the bottom of the envelopes is toward the back of the printer when viewed from the front.

Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray 2-71

8

Align the paper guide with both sides of the stack.

2

IMPORTANT

• Make sure that there is no space between the paper guide and the envelopes, and be careful not to press the envelopes so hard that they are distorted. They may result in misfeeds or paper jams.

• Do not touch the envelopes in the multi-purpose tray or pull them out during printing. This may result in an error in the printer.

9

Lower the paper retaining lever.

Proceed to printer driver settings.

2-72 Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray

10

Select [Print] from the [File] menu in the application. Select this printer for [Name] or [Printer Name], and then click

[Properties].

2

The Properties dialog box for the printer is displayed.

11

Display the [Page Setup] sheet, then from [Page Size], select the size of a document that you have created in the application.

Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray 2-73

2

NOTE

If you select any of [Envelope DL], [Envelope COM10], [Envelope C5], [Envelope

Monarch], or [Envelope B5] for the page size, a message appears and the appropriate paper type is automatically set.

12

From [Output Size], select the size of the loaded paper as needed.

Leave the setting at [Match Page Size] when the page size and the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray are the same, since there is no need to change the setting.

IMPORTANT

If the settings for [Page Size] and [Output Size] are different, the printer produces an enlarged or reduced print automatically.

2-74 Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray

13

Click [OK] to close the Properties dialog box.

14

Click [OK] to start printing.

2

Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray 2-75

2

2-sided Printing

This printer allows you to perform automatic 2-sided printing by installing the duplex unit. Plain paper (64 - 80 g/m 2 ) and heavy paper (81 - 90 g/m 2 ) of A3, B4, A4, B5,

A5, Legal, Ledger (11 x 17), Letter, and Executive sizes can be used for automatic

2-sided printing.

IMPORTANT

• You cannot perform automatic 2-sided printing on custom paper sizes, heavy paper (91 -

128 g/m 2 ), transparencies, labels, and envelopes.

• During 2-sided printing, do not touch the paper until it is delivered onto the output tray completely. During 2-sided printing, the paper is first delivered partially after the front side is printed, and then it is fed again to be printed on the reverse side.

• When performing automatic 2-sided printing on heavy paper (81 - 90 g/m 2 ), perform the following settings: a Select [Plain Paper] for [Paper Type] in the [Paper Source] sheet.

b Click the [Finishing Details] button in the [Finishing] sheet and the [Advanced Settings] button in the [Finishing Details] dialog box, and then, select [Mode 4] for [Fixing Mode] in the [Advanced Settings] dialog box.

NOTE

• When the last page for the 2-sided printing is 1-sided printing, the printer prints faster than normal 2-sided printing by clicking the [Finishing Details] button in the [Finishing] sheet and the [Advanced Settings] button in the [Finishing Details] dialog box, and then placing a checkmark for [Print Last Page in 1-sided Mode when 2-sided Printing is Set] in the [Advanced Settings] dialog box. However, when printing punched paper or previously printed paper, the orientation or printing surface of the last page may differ from other pages. In this case, remove the checkmark.

• When paper jams occur frequently during 2-sided printing, display the Printer Status

Window, select [Device Settings] from the [Options] menu, and then place a checkmark for [2-sided Special Mode]. Printing speed will be slower than when performing regular

2-sided printing.

2-76 2-sided Printing

Automatic 2-sided Printing

1

Load paper in the multi-purpose tray or paper cassette.

On automatic 2-sided printing, the reverse side of the paper is printed first, therefore the paper should be loaded in the opposite orientation to that for

1-sided printing. When printing paper such as a letterhead in which faces and

directional orientations specified, see "Loading Paper When Performing

Automatic 2-sided Printing," on p. 2-80.

2

Select [Print] from the [File] menu in the application. Select this printer for [Name] or [Printer Name], and then click

[Properties].

2

The Properties dialog box for the printer is displayed.

2-sided Printing 2-77

2

3

Display the [Page Setup] sheet, then from [Page Size], select the size of a document that you have created in the application.

4

From [Output Size], select the size of the loaded paper as needed.

Leave the setting at [Match Page Size] when the page size and the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray are the same, since there is no need to change the setting.

IMPORTANT

If the settings for [Page Size] and [Output Size] are different, the printer produces an enlarged or reduced print automatically.

2-78 2-sided Printing

5

Display the [Finishing] sheet and select [2-sided Printing] for

[Print Style].

2

6

Click [OK] to close the Properties dialog box.

2-sided Printing 2-79

7

Click [OK] to start printing.

2

Loading Paper When Performing Automatic 2-sided

Printing

On automatic 2-sided printing, the reverse side of the paper is printed first, therefore the paper should be loaded in the opposite orientation to that for 1-sided printing. When printing paper such as a letterhead in which faces and directional orientations specified, load the paper using the following procedure:

Loading Paper in a Paper Cassette

When loading paper such as A4 or Letter size paper in landscape orientation in the standard cassette (Cassette 1)

Load the paper so that the printing side is facing down and the top edge is toward the right of the printer when viewed from the front.

:Feeding direction

ABC

2-80 2-sided Printing

When loading paper such as A3 or B4 size paper in portrait orientation in the standard cassette (Cassette 1)

Load the paper so that the printing side is facing down and the top edge is toward the back of the printer when viewed from the front.

:Feeding direction

ABC

2

When loading paper such as A4 or Letter size paper in landscape orientation in the paper cassette of a paper feeder (Cassette 2, 3, or 4)

Load the paper so that the printing side is facing up and the top edge is toward the right of the printer when viewed from the front.

:Feeding direction

ABC

2-sided Printing 2-81

2

When loading paper such as A3 or B4 size paper in portrait orientation in the paper cassette of a paper feeder (Cassette 2, 3, or 4)

Load the paper so that the printing side is facing up and the top edge is toward the front of the printer when viewed from the front.

:Feeding direction

ABC

When Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray

When loading paper such as A4 or Letter size paper in landscape orientation

Load the paper so that the printing side is facing down and the top edge is toward the right of the printer when viewed from the front.

:Feeding direction

ABC

2-82 2-sided Printing

When loading paper such as B4 or A3 size paper in portrait orientation

Load the paper so that the printing side is facing down and the top edge is toward the back of the printer when viewed from the front.

:Feeding direction

ABC

Performing 2-sided Printing Manually

Since this printer can print the reverse side of previously printed paper, you can print both sides of the paper to which automatic 2-sided printing cannot be applied.

NOTE

If a paper jam occurs when printing the reverse side of previously printed paper, click the

[Finishing Details] button in the [Finishing] sheet and the [Advanced Settings] button in the [Finishing Details] dialog box, and then place a checkmark for [Print on the Back of

Printed Paper from the Multi-purpose Tray] in the [Advanced Settings] dialog box.

When loading paper such as A4 or Letter size paper in landscape orientation in the multi-purpose tray

Load the paper so that the printing side is facing up and the top edge is toward the right of the printer when viewed from the front.

:Feeding direction

2

ABC

2-sided Printing 2-83

2

When loading paper such as A3 or B4 size paper in portrait orientation in the multi-purpose tray

Load the paper so that the printing side is facing up and the top edge is toward the back of the printer when viewed from the front.

:Feeding direction

ABC

2-84 2-sided Printing

Setting Up the Printing Environment

3

CHAPTER

This chapter describes the procedure for installing the printer driver in a computer and specifying the settings for printing from a network computer by sharing the printer on the network.

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

After Installing the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

Steps for Printing to Be Followed Each Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

Required System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

Installing the CAPT Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

For Windows 98/Me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

For Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

For Windows XP/Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

After Completing Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

Checking the Operations by Printer Status Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

Print Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58

Installation on the Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-67

Uninstalling the CAPT Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77

3-1

3

Introduction

After Installing the Printer

The following shows the tasks that should be performed after installing the printer:

Installing the printer driver

The printer driver is software required for printing from an application you use. Specify the print settings in the printer driver. The procedure for installing the printer driver varies depending on the network environment.

When printing with the printer and computer connected with the USB cable (See p. 3-4)

• When printing with the optional network board installed, and the printer and the computer connected with LAN (See Network Guide)

Sharing the printer on a network (See p. 3-57)

If you share this printer on a network and use it from a computer on the network, you must specify the settings for the computer and install the printer driver on the client computers.

Steps for Printing to Be Followed Each Time

The following shows the tasks that should be performed each time you print:

Specifying printing preferences

Specify the paper size, document size, and print copies in the printer driver. If you do not specify these printing preferences properly, you may not obtain an accurate print.

Performing printing

Select the print menu from the application. This procedure differs depending on the application you use. See the instruction manual supplied with your application.

3-2 Introduction

Required System Environment

The following system environment is required to use the printer driver:

Operating system software environment

• Microsoft Windows 98

Microsoft Windows Me

Microsoft Windows 2000 Server/Professional

Microsoft Windows XP Professional/Home Edition

Microsoft Windows Server 2003 (32-bit processor version only)

- System Requirements (minimum required)

CPU

Memory (RAM)*

Hard disk

Windows 98/Me Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003

Pentium II 300 MHz Pentium II 300 MHz or more or more

64 MB or more 128 MB or more

40 MB or more Windows 2000: 60 MB or more

Windows XP/Server 2003: 70 MB or more

(PC/AT Compatible)

* As the amount of memory that can be actually used differs depending on the system configuration of your computer or your application, the above environment does not guarantee printing in all cases.

- System Requirements (recommended)

CPU

Memory (RAM)

Windows 98/Me Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003

Pentium III 600 MHz or Pentium III 600 MHz or more more

128 MB or more 256 MB or more

Interface Environment

• USB: USB 2.0 High-Speed (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 only), USB Full-Speed

(USB 1.1 equivalent)

NOTE

• When using Sound, a PC synthesizer (and the driver for PCM synthesizer) must be installed in your computer. Do not use a PC Speaker driver (speaker.drv).

• Your system environment is required to support two-way communication.

3

Introduction 3-3

3

Installing the CAPT Software

This section describes the procedure for installing the CAPT software when connecting this printer to your computer with a USB cable.

For Windows 98/Me (See p. 3-5)

For Windows 2000 (See p. 3-21)

For Windows XP/Server 2003 (See p. 3-36)

IMPORTANT

• The CAPT software is required for printing with this printer. Be sure to install the CAPT software.

• When there is not enough free hard disk space, the following dialog box will appear during the installation. In this case, click [OK] to stop the installation and increase the free space, and then install the CAPT software again.

NOTE

• For details on the procedure for installing the software when installing the optional network board and connecting the printer to the computer with LAN, see "Network

Guide".

• For details on procedure for installing the software when sharing this printer on a network

and printing from a computer on the network, see "Printing from a Network Computer by

Sharing the Printer on a Network," on p. 3-57.

• This printer does not come with a USB cable. Have the appropriate one available for your computer.

3-4 Installing the CAPT Software

For Windows 98/Me

The screen shots used in this section are from Windows Me.

Installing from CD-ROM Setup

1

Make sure that the printer is turned OFF and the computer and printer are not connected with a USB cable.

IMPORTANT

Connect the USB cable at the appropriate point (Step 11 on p. 3-8) during the

installation, and then turn the power ON.

• If a Wizard appears by the Plug and Play automatic setup, click [Cancel], and then install the CAPT software using this procedure.

2

Turn the power of the computer on and start up Windows 98/

Me.

3

3

Insert the supplied "LBP3600 User Software" CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

If the CD-ROM is already set in the drive, take it out and insert it into the drive again.

CD-ROM Setup appears automatically.

IMPORTANT

If CD-ROM Setup does not appear, select [Run] from the [Start] menu, enter

"D:\English\CNAB1MNU.exe", and then click [OK]. (The CD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual. The CD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer being used.)

Installing the CAPT Software 3-5

4

Click [Install].

3

The dialog box for confirming the language is displayed.

5

Confirm the language and click [Yes].

After the preparation for installation is completed, the CAPT (Canon Advanced

Printing Technology) software installer starts up, and the [Setup Wizard] dialog box appears.

6

Click [Next].

The [License Agreement] dialog box is displayed.

3-6 Installing the CAPT Software

7

Confirm the contents and select [I accept the terms in the license agreement], and then click [Next].

8

Select [Manually Set Port to Install], then click [Next].

3

9

Place a checkmark for [Install Printer Driver through a USB

Connection], then click [Next].

Installing the CAPT Software 3-7

3

Depending on the environment, a message that prompts you to restart the computer may appear. In this case, restart the computer and continue the installation.

10

The message "Installation cannot be stopped once it starts.

Do you want to continue?" is displayed. Click [Yes].

11

After the window shown below is displayed, connect the printer to the computer with the USB cable, then turn the power of the printer ON.

Connect the printer to the computer with the USB cable.

3-8 Installing the CAPT Software

Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer ON.

OFF

ON

Installation of the USB class driver and the printer driver starts automatically.

NOTE

If the printer is not recognized automatically even after the USB cable is connected,

see "Installation Problems," on p. 7-50.

12

The window that informs you the completion of the installation is displayed. Select [Restart my computer now], then click [Exit].

3

Windows restarts.

The installation of the USB class driver and the printer driver is completed.

Installing the CAPT Software 3-9

3

Installing with Plug and Play

IMPORTANT

Before installing the CAPT software with Plug and Play, make sure that the printer is properly connected to the computer and the power of the printer is turned ON.

1

Turn the power of the computer on and start up Windows 98/

Me.

The [Add New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears.

For Windows Me

If the following dialog box appears, proceed to Step 2.

If the following dialog box appears, proceed to Step 9.

3-10 Installing the CAPT Software

For Windows 98

If the following dialog box appears, click [Next], then proceed to Step 2.

If the following dialog box appears, click [Next], then proceed to Step 9.

3

2

Select [Specify the location of the driver (Advanced)], then click [Next].

For Windows 98: Select [Search for the best driver for your device.

(Recommended)], then click [Next].

The dialog box for specifying the search location is displayed.

Installing the CAPT Software 3-11

3

3

Insert the supplied "LBP3600 User Software" CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

If CD-ROM Setup appears, click [Exit].

4

Select [Search for the best driver for your device.

(Recommended).], remove the checkmark from [Removable

Media (Floppy, CD-ROM...)], place a checkmark for [Specify a location], and then click [Browse].

For Windows 98: Remove the checkmarks from [Floppy disk drives] and

[CD-ROM drive], place a checkmark for [Specify a location], and then click

[Browse].

5

Select [D:\English\USBPORT\WinMe], and then click [OK].

For Windows 98: Select [D:\English\USBPORT\Win98], and then click [OK].

The CD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual. The CD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer being used.

3-12 Installing the CAPT Software

6

Make sure that the folder to be browsed is displayed for

[Specify a location], and then click [Next].

7

Click [Next].

Installation of the USB class driver starts.

8

Click [Finish].

The printer is detected automatically. Please wait until it is completed.

Installing the CAPT Software 3-13

3

The [Add New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears. For Windows 98, click

[Next].

3

9

Select [Specify the location of the driver (Advanced)], then click [Next].

For Windows 98: Select [Search for the best driver for your device.

(Recommended)], then click [Next].

The dialog box for specifying the search location is displayed.

10

If the supplied "LBP3600 User Software" CD-ROM is not in the

CD-ROM drive, insert the "LBP3600 User Software" CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

If CD-ROM Setup appears, click [Exit].

3-14 Installing the CAPT Software

11

Select [Search for the best driver for your device.

(Recommended).], remove the checkmark from [Removable

Media (Floppy, CD-ROM...)], place a checkmark for [Specify a location], and then click [Browse].

For Windows 98: Remove the checkmarks from [Floppy disk drives] and

[CD-ROM drive], place a checkmark for [Specify a location], and then click

[Browse].

3

12

Select [D:\English\Win98_Me], and then click [OK].

The CD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual. The CD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer being used.

Installing the CAPT Software 3-15

13

Make sure that the folder to be browsed is displayed for

[Specify a location], and then click [Next].

3

14

Click [Next].

15

Enter a new name in [Printer name] if you want to change the printer name.

If another printer driver has been already installed in the computer, the message

"Do you want your Windows-based programs to use this printer as the default printer?" appears. In this case, select [Yes] or [No].

3-16 Installing the CAPT Software

16

Click [Finish].

Copying files is started.

17

When the dialog box for completing installation appears, click

[OK].

18

Click [Finish].

3

The installation of the USB class driver and the printer driver is completed.

Installing from [Add Printer Wizard]

NOTE

When installing the CAPT software from [Add Printer Wizard], the USB port for connecting this printer has to have already been registered.

1

From the [Start] menu, select [Settings]

[Printers] to open the [Printers] folder. Then, double-click the [Add Printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] dialog box is displayed.

NOTE

The [Add Printer Wizard] dialog box is also displayed using the following procedure:

- Double-click [My Computer] ➞ [Control Panel] ➞ [Printers] ➞ [Add Printer] (For

Windows Me).

- Double-click [My Computer] ➞ [Printers] ➞ [Add Printer] (For Windows 98).

Installing the CAPT Software 3-17

2

Click [Next].

3

3

Select [Local printer], then click [Next].

NOTE

This window does not appear when the network settings are not configured.

4

Click [Have Disk].

3-18 Installing the CAPT Software

5

Insert the supplied "LBP3600 User Software" CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive, then click [Browse].

If CD-ROM Setup appears, click [Exit].

6

Select [D:\English\Win98_Me], and then click [OK].

The CD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual. The CD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer being used.

3

7

Confirm the contents of [Copy manufacturer's files from], then click [OK].

For example, when your CD-ROM drive is drive [D:], it is displayed as

[D:\English\Win98_Me].

"Canon LBP3600" is displayed in the [Add Printer Wizard] dialog box.

Installing the CAPT Software 3-19

8

Select this printer for [Printers], then click [Next].

3

9

Select the USB port for connecting this printer, and then click

[Next].

10

Enter a new name in [Printer name] if you want to change the printer name.

If another printer driver has been already installed in the computer, the message

"Do you want your Windows-based programs to use this printer as the default printer?" appears. In this case, select [Yes] or [No].

3-20 Installing the CAPT Software

11

Click [Finish].

Copying files is started.

12

When the dialog box for completing installation appears, click

[OK].

13

If the printer and computer are not connected, connect them with a USB cable, and then turn the power of the printer ON.

The installation of the printer driver is completed.

3

For Windows 2000

Installing from CD-ROM Setup

1

Make sure that the printer is turned OFF and the computer and printer are not connected with a USB cable.

IMPORTANT

Connect the USB cable at the appropriate point (Step 12 on p. 3-25) during the

installation, and then turn the power ON.

• If a Wizard appears by the Plug and Play automatic setup, click [Cancel], and then install the CAPT software using this procedure.

2

Turn the power of the computer on and start up Windows

2000.

3

Log on as a user who is a member of Administrators.

NOTE

Full Control Permission is required for the installation of the printer driver.

Installing the CAPT Software 3-21

3

4

Insert the supplied "LBP3600 User Software" CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

If the CD-ROM is already set in the drive, take it out and insert it into the drive again.

CD-ROM Setup appears automatically.

IMPORTANT

If CD-ROM Setup does not appear, select [Run] from the [Start] menu, enter

"D:\English\CNAB1MNU.exe", and then click [OK]. (The CD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual. The CD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer being used.)

5

Click [Install].

The dialog box for confirming the language is displayed.

6

Confirm the language and click [Yes].

After the preparation for installation is completed, the CAPT (Canon Advanced

Printing Technology) software installer starts up, and the [Setup Wizard] dialog box appears.

3-22 Installing the CAPT Software

7

Click [Next].

The [License Agreement] dialog box is displayed.

8

Confirm the contents and select [I accept the terms in the license agreement], and then click [Next].

3

Installing the CAPT Software 3-23

9

Select [Manually Set Port to Install], then click [Next].

3

10

Place a checkmark for [Install Printer Driver through a USB

Connection], then click [Next].

11

The message "Installation cannot be stopped once it starts.

Do you want to continue?" is displayed. Click [Yes].

3-24 Installing the CAPT Software

12

After the window shown below is displayed, connect the printer to the computer with the USB cable, then turn the power of the printer ON.

Connect the printer to the computer with the USB cable.

Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer ON.

OFF

ON

Installation of the USB class driver (supplied with OS) and the printer driver starts automatically.

NOTE

If the printer is not recognized automatically even after the USB cable is connected,

see "Installation Problems," on p. 7-50.

Installing the CAPT Software 3-25

3

13

The window that informs you the completion of the installation is displayed. Select [Restart my computer now], then click [Exit].

3

Windows restarts.

The installation of the USB class driver (supplied with OS) and the printer driver is completed.

Installing with Plug and Play

IMPORTANT

Before installing the CAPT software with Plug and Play, make sure that the printer is properly connected to the computer and the power of the printer is turned ON.

1

Turn the power of the computer on and start up Windows

2000.

2

Log on as a user who is a member of Administrators.

NOTE

Full Control Permission is required for the installation of the printer driver.

3-26 Installing the CAPT Software

3

Click [Next].

4

Select [Search for a suitable driver for my device

(recommended)], then click [Next].

3

NOTE

"Unknown" may be displayed as the name of the device.

Installing the CAPT Software 3-27

5

Remove the checkmarks from [Floppy disk drives] and

[CD-ROM drives], place a checkmark for [Specify a location], and then click [Next].

3

6

Insert the supplied "LBP3600 User Software" CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive, then click [Browse].

If CD-ROM Setup appears, click [Exit].

7

Select [D:\English\Win2K_XP]. Then select [CNAB1STK.INF] and click [Open].

The CD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual. The CD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer being used.

3-28 Installing the CAPT Software

8

Make sure that the folder to be browsed is displayed for [Copy manufacturer's files from], then click [OK].

The dialog box for completing the search for a driver file is displayed.

9

Click [Next].

3

Copying files is started.

Then, [Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard] appears.

NOTE

If the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box appears, click [Yes].

Installing the CAPT Software 3-29

10

Click [Finish].

3

The installation of the USB class driver (supplied with OS) and the printer driver is completed.

Installing from [Add Printer Wizard]

IMPORTANT

When printing a test page, make sure that the printer is properly connected to the computer and the power of the printer is turned ON before installing the CAPT software.

NOTE

When installing the CAPT software from [Add Printer Wizard], the USB port for connecting this printer has to have already been registered.

1

Turn the power of the computer on and start up Windows

2000.

2

Log on as a user who is a member of Administrators.

IMPORTANT

If a Wizard appears by the Plug and Play automatic setup, click [Cancel], and then install the CAPT software using this procedure.

NOTE

Full Control Permission is required for the installation of the printer driver.

3-30 Installing the CAPT Software

3

From the [Start] menu, select [Settings]

[Printers] to open the [Printers] folder. Then, double-click [Add Printer].

The [Add Printer Wizard] dialog box is displayed.

NOTE

The [Add Printer Wizard] dialog box is also displayed by double-clicking [My

Computer] ➞ [Control Panel] ➞ [Printers] ➞ [Add Printer].

4

Click [Next].

3

5

Make sure that [Local printer] is selected, then click [Next].

NOTE

Do not place a checkmark for [Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer].

Installing the CAPT Software 3-31

6

Select the USB port for connecting this printer, and then click

[Next].

3

7

Click [Have Disk].

8

Insert the supplied "LBP3600 User Software" CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive, and then click [Browse].

If CD-ROM Setup appears, click [Exit].

3-32 Installing the CAPT Software

9

Select [D:\English\Win2K_XP]. Select [CNAB1STK.INF], then click [Open].

The CD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual. The CD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer being used.

10

Confirm the contents of [Copy manufacturer's files from], then click [OK].

For example, when your CD-ROM drive is drive [D:], it is displayed as

[D:\English\Win2K_XP].

3

"Canon LBP3600" is displayed in the [Add Printer Wizard] dialog box.

Installing the CAPT Software 3-33

11

Click [Next].

3

12

Enter a new name in [Printer name] if you want to change the printer name, then click [Next].

If another printer driver has been already installed in the computer, the message

"Do you want your Windows-based programs to use this printer as the default printer?" appears. In this case, select [Yes] or [No].

3-34 Installing the CAPT Software

13

Click [Next].

NOTE

When sharing this printer on a network, select [Share as], then click [Next]. The window for entering [Location] and [Comment] is displayed. Enter them as necessary, then click [Next].

14

When printing a test page, click [Yes], then click [Next].

3

Installing the CAPT Software 3-35

15

Click [Finish].

3

Copying files is started.

When printing a test page, a dialog box will appear after printing. Click [OK] to close the dialog box.

NOTE

If the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box appears, click [Yes].

16

If the printer and computer are not connected, connect them with a USB cable, and then turn the power of the printer ON.

The installation of the printer driver is completed.

For Windows XP/Server 2003

The screen shots used in this section are from Windows XP.

Installing from CD-ROM Setup

1

Make sure that the printer is turned OFF and the computer and printer are not connected with a USB cable.

IMPORTANT

Connect the USB cable at the appropriate point (Step 12 on p. 3-40) during the

installation, and then turn the power ON.

• If a Wizard appears by the Plug and Play automatic setup, click [Cancel], and then install the CAPT software using this procedure.

3-36 Installing the CAPT Software

2

Turn the power of the computer on and start up Windows XP/

Server 2003.

3

Log on as a user who is a member of Administrators.

NOTE

Full Control Permission is required for the installation of the printer driver.

4

Insert the supplied "LBP3600 User Software" CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

If the CD-ROM is already set in the drive, take it out and insert it into the drive again.

CD-ROM Setup appears automatically.

IMPORTANT

If CD-ROM Setup does not appear, select [Run] from the [Start] menu, enter

"D:\English\CNAB1MNU.exe", and then click [OK]. (The CD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual. The CD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer being used.)

5

Click [Install].

3

The dialog box for confirming the language is displayed.

Installing the CAPT Software 3-37

3

6

Confirm the language and click [Yes].

After the preparation for installation is completed, the CAPT (Canon Advanced

Printing Technology) software installer starts up, and the [Setup Wizard] dialog box appears.

7

Click [Next].

The [License Agreement] dialog box is displayed.

8

Confirm the contents and select [I accept the terms in the license agreement], and then click [Next].

3-38 Installing the CAPT Software

9

Select [Manually Set Port to Install], then click [Next].

10

Place a checkmark for [Install Printer Driver through a USB

Connection], then click [Next].

3

11

The message "Installation cannot be stopped once it starts.

Do you want to continue?" is displayed. Click [Yes].

Installing the CAPT Software 3-39

12

After the window shown below is displayed, connect the printer to the computer with the USB cable, then turn the power of the printer ON.

3

Connect the printer to the computer with the USB cable.

Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer ON.

OFF

ON

3-40

Installation of the USB class driver (supplied with OS) and the printer driver starts automatically.

NOTE

If the printer is not recognized automatically even after the USB cable is connected,

see "Installation Problems," on p. 7-50.

Installing the CAPT Software

13

The window that informs you the completion of the installation is displayed. Select [Restart my computer now], then click [Exit].

Windows restarts.

The installation of the USB class driver (supplied with OS) and the printer driver is completed.

Installing with Plug and Play

IMPORTANT

Before installing the CAPT software with Plug and Play, make sure that the printer is properly connected to the computer and the power of the printer is turned ON.

1

Turn the power of the computer on and start up Windows XP/

Server 2003.

2

Log on as a user who is a member of Administrators.

NOTE

Full Control Permission is required for the installation of the printer driver.

3

Installing the CAPT Software 3-41

3

Insert the "LBP3600 User Software" CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Select [Install from a list or specific location

(Advanced)], then click [Next].

If CD-ROM Setup appears, click [Exit].

3

4

Select [Search for the best driver in these locations.], remove the checkmark from [Search removable media (floppy,

CD-ROM...)], place a checkmark for [Include this location in the search:], and then click [Browse].

3-42 Installing the CAPT Software

5

Select [D:\English\Win2K_XP], and then click [OK].

The CD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual. The CD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer being used.

6

Make sure that the folder to be browsed is displayed for

[Include this location in the search], then click [Next].

3

The installation process is displayed.

Then, [Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard] is displayed.

NOTE

If the [Hardware Installation] dialog box appears, click [Continue Anyway].

Installing the CAPT Software 3-43

7

Click [Finish].

3

The installation of the USB class driver (supplied with OS) and the printer driver is completed.

Installing from [Add Printer Wizard]

IMPORTANT

When printing a test page, make sure that the printer is properly connected to the computer and the power of the printer is turned ON before installing the CAPT software.

NOTE

When installing the CAPT software from [Add Printer Wizard], the USB port for connecting this printer has to have already been registered.

1

Turn the power of the computer on and start up Windows XP/

Server 2003.

IMPORTANT

If a Wizard appears by the Plug and Play automatic setup, click [Cancel], and then install the CAPT software using this procedure.

2

Log on as a user who is a member of Administrators.

NOTE

Full Control Permission is required for the installation of the printer driver.

3-44 Installing the CAPT Software

3

Display the [Printers and Faxes] folder.

For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003:

From the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].

For Windows XP Home Edition:

From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] , then click [Printers and Other

Hardware] ➞ [Printers and Faxes].

4

Click [Add a printer].

For Windows Server 2003: Double-click [Add Printer].

3

The [Add Printer Wizard] dialog box is displayed.

5

Click [Next].

Installing the CAPT Software 3-45

6

Make sure that [Local printer attached to this computer] is selected, then click [Next].

3

NOTE

Do not place a checkmark for [Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer].

7

Make sure that [Use the following port] is selected, select the

USB port to which this printer is connected, and then click

[Next].

3-46 Installing the CAPT Software

8

Click [Have Disk].

9

Insert the supplied "LBP3600 User Software" CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive, and then click [Browse].

If CD-ROM Setup appears, click [Exit].

3

Installing the CAPT Software 3-47

10

Select [D:\English\Win2K_XP]. Select [CNAB1STK.INF], then click [Open].

The CD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual. The CD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer being used.

3

11

Confirm the contents of [Copy manufacturer's files from], then click [OK].

For example, when your CD-ROM drive is drive [D:], it is displayed as

[D:\English\Win2K_XP].

"Canon LBP3600" is displayed in the [Add Printer Wizard] dialog box.

3-48 Installing the CAPT Software

12

Click [Next].

13

Enter a new name in [Printer name] if you want to change the printer name, then click [Next].

If another printer driver has been already installed in the computer, the message

"Do you want your Windows-based programs to use this printer as the default printer?" appears. In this case, select [Yes] or [No].

3

Installing the CAPT Software 3-49

14

Click [Next].

3

NOTE

When sharing this printer on a network, select [Share name], then click [Next]. The window for entering [Location] and [Comment] is displayed. Enter them as necessary, then click [Next].

15

When printing a test page, click [Yes], then click [Next].

3-50 Installing the CAPT Software

16

Click [Finish].

Copying files is started.

When printing a test page, a dialog box will appear after printing. Click [OK] to close the dialog box.

17

If the printer and computer are not connected, connect them with a USB cable, and then turn the power of the printer ON.

The installation of the printer driver is completed.

3

Installing the CAPT Software 3-51

3

After Completing Installation

When the installation of the CAPT software is completed, the icon and folder for this printer will be created.

For Windows 98/Me/2000

The icon for this printer is displayed in the [Printers] folder.

[Canon Printer Uninstaller] is added to [Programs] under the [Start] menu.

3-52 After Completing Installation

For Windows XP/Server 2003

The icon for this printer is displayed in the [Printers and Faxes] folder.

[Canon Printer Uninstaller] is added to [All Programs] under the [Start] menu.

3

After Completing Installation 3-53

3

Checking the Operations by Printer Status Print

Before using the printer for the first time, be sure to print the printer status to check the operations using the following procedure. Printer Status Print prints the optional settings of the printer and printer status such as total number of printouts.

NOTE

• Printer Status Print is designed to be printed on A4 size paper. Load A4 size paper.

• The screen shots used in this section are from Windows 2000.

1

Display the [Printers] or [Printers and Faxes] folder.

For Windows 98/Me/2000: From the [Start] menu, select [Settings] ➞ [Printers].

For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003: From the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].

For Windows XP Home Edition: From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], then click [Printers and Other Hardware] ➞ [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers] folder or the [Printers and Faxes] folder is displayed.

2

Select the icon for this printer, then select [Printing

Preferences] from the [File] menu.

For Windows 98/Me: Select the icon for this printer, then select [Properties] from the [File] menu.

3-54 Checking the Operations by Printer Status Print

3

Display the [Page Setup] sheet, then click [ ] (Display

Printer Status Window) to start up the Printer Status Window.

NOTE

For details on the Printer Status Window, see "Printer Status Window," on p. 4-79.

4

From the [Options] menu, select [Utility] ➞ [Printer Status

Print].

3

Checking the Operations by Printer Status Print 3-55

3

5

Click [OK].

Printer Status Print is printed.

IMPORTANT

This is a sample of Status Print. The contents may differ from the Status Print printed by your computer.

NOTE

If Printer Status Print is not printed properly, see "Chapter 7 Troubleshooting".

3-56 Checking the Operations by Printer Status Print

Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the

Printer on a Network

When you share this printer on a network, you can use it as a network printer, which enables printing from other computers that are not directly connected to this printer.

If this printer is going to be used by multiple computers on a network, specify the settings in the following procedure. Here, the computer directly connected to the printer is called "print server", and the other computers which use the printer through the network are called "clients".

Network Environments

LBP3600

Print Server of

Windows 98/Me

Local

Installation

3

For Printing

Download

Installation

Windows 2000/XP

/Server 2003

Client

Windows 98/Me

Client

Download

Installation

Network Environments

LBP3600

Print Server of

Windows 2000/XP

/Server 2003

Local

Installation

For Printing

Download

Installation

Windows 2000/XP

/Server 2003

Client

Windows 98/Me

Client

Download Installation

Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network 3-57

3

When using the print server environment, perform the following settings:

1.

Installing the Printer Driver to the Print Server

- When the printer and print server are connected with the USB cable (See p.

3-4)

- When the optional network board is installed, and the printer and print server are connected with the LAN cable (See Network Guide)

2.

Setting the Print Server (Network) (For Windows 98/Me, see p. 3-58; For

Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, see p. 3-62)

3.

Setting the Print Server (Printer Sharing) (For Windows 98/Me, see p. 3-61; For

Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, see p. 3-64)

4.

Installation on Clients (See p. 3-67)

NOTE

Using this printer on your network requires that both the print server and clients should be using Windows 98/Me or Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003.

Print Server Settings

For Windows 98/Me

NOTE

The screen shots used in this section are from Windows Me.

Network Settings

1

Double-click [My Computer]

[Control Panel] the

[Network] icon.

The [Network] dialog box is displayed.

3-58 Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network

2

Display the [Configuration] sheet, then click [Add].

The [Select Network Component Type] dialog box is displayed.

3

Click the [Service] icon, then click [Add].

4

Select [File and printer sharing for Microsoft Networks], then click [OK].

3

The [Select Network Component Type] dialog box appears first, then the

[Network] dialog box reappears.

Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network 3-59

5

Click [File and Print Sharing].

3

6

Make sure that [I want to be able to allow others to print to my printer(s).] is selected, then click [OK].

7

Display the [Access Control] sheet and select [Share-level access control] or [User-level access control].

3-60

8

Click [OK], then restart Windows.

Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network

Printer Sharing Settings

1

From the [Start] menu, select [Settings]

[Printers].

The [Printers] folder is displayed.

2

Right-click the icon for this printer, then select [Sharing] from the pop-up menu.

3

3

Select [Shared As]. Change [Share Name] if you want to, then enter [Comment] and [Password] as needed.

Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network 3-61

3

NOTE

If you have selected [User-level access control] in Step 7 of "Network Settings"

(See p. 3-60), click [Add] and select users that can use the printer.

• Do not enter blank or special characters in [Share Name].

4

Click [OK].

The printer icon changes to the printer sharing icon.

For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003

NOTE

The screen shots used in this section are from Windows 2000.

Network Settings

1

From the [Start] menu, select [Settings]

[Network and

Dial-up Connections].

For Windows XP: From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], then click

[Network and Internet Connections] ➞ [Network Connections].

For Windows Server 2003: From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] ➞

[Network Connections] ➞ [Local Area Connection], and then proceed to Step 3.

For Windows 2000: The [Network and Dial-up Connections] folder is displayed.

For Windows XP: The [Network Connections] folder is displayed.

3-62 Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network

2

Right-click the [Local Area Connection] icon, then select

[Properties] from the pop-up menu.

The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.

3

Make sure that [File and Printers Sharing for Microsoft

Networks] is selected, then click [OK].

3

Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network 3-63

3

Printer Sharing Settings

NOTE

For Windows XP, the printer cannot be shared on a network at the default settings (the settings immediately after the installation).

Printer sharing settings require running [Network Setup Wizard] to enable the sharing settings.

For more details, see Online Help for Windows.

1

From the [Start] menu, select [Settings]

[Printers].

For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003: From the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].

For Windows XP Home Edition: From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers and Other Hardware] ➞ [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers] folder is displayed.

2

Right-click the icon for this printer, then select [Sharing] from the pop-up menu.

3-64 Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network

3

Select [Shared as]. Change the share name as needed.

For Windows XP/Server 2003: Select [Share this printer].

NOTE

• You can also specify the sharing settings during the local installation.

• Do not enter blank or special characters in [Shared as].

4

Click [Additional Drivers].

3

The [Additional Drivers] dialog box is displayed.

Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network 3-65

5

Place a checkmark for [Windows 95 or 98], then click [OK].

For Windows XP/Server 2003: Place a checkmark for [Windows 95, 98 and Me], and then click [OK].

3

6

Insert the supplied "LBP3600 User Software" CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

If the [Insert Disk] dialog box appears, click [OK].

7

Click [Browse]. When your CD-ROM drive is drive [D:], select

[D:\English\Win98_Me], and then click [OK].

Copying files is started.

3-66 Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network

8

Click [Close].

The printer icon changes to the printer sharing icon.

Installation on the Clients

This section describes the procedure for installing the printer driver on the client computers.

There are two ways to install the printer driver: local installation and download installation.

Local Installation (See p. 3-68)

Installing the printer driver using the supplied CD-ROM.

Download and Installation

Installing the printer driver without using the supplied CD-ROM, but by downloading the printer driver from the print server. There are the following two ways of download installation:

Installing from [Add Printer Wizard] (See p. 3-73)

Installing from [Windows Explorer] (See p. 3-75)

IMPORTANT

If you are using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, be sure to log on as a user who is a member of Administrators when starting up.

Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network 3-67

3

3

NOTE

• Clients can use both Windows 98/Me and Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003.

• If your print server is Windows 98/Me, you cannot download and install on Windows

2000/XP/Server 2003.

• The screen shots used in this section are from Windows 2000.

Installing from CD-ROM Setup

1

Insert the supplied "LBP3600 User Software" CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

If the CD-ROM is already set in the drive, take it out and insert it into the drive again.

CD-ROM Setup appears automatically.

IMPORTANT

If CD-ROM Setup does not appear automatically, select [Run] from the [Start] menu, enter "D:\English\CNAB1MNU.exe", and then click [OK]. (The CD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual. The CD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer being used.)

2

Click [Install].

The dialog box for confirming the language is displayed.

3

Confirm the language and click [Yes].

3-68 Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network

After the preparation for installation is completed, the CAPT (Canon Advanced

Printing Technology) software installer starts up, and the [Setup Wizard] dialog box appears.

4

Click [Next].

The [License Agreement] dialog box is displayed.

5

Confirm the contents and select [I accept the terms in the license agreement], and then click [Next].

3

Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network 3-69

6

Select [Manually Set Port to Install], then click [Next].

3

7

Click [Next].

NOTE

Do not place a checkmark for [Install Printer Driver through a USB Connection].

3-70 Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network

8

Select [Use Network Printer] for [Port Settings], then click

[Settings].

9

Select the directory of the print server, then click [OK].

3

10

Select whether or not to use this printer as the default printer, then click [Next].

Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network 3-71

11

Click [Start].

3

12

The message "Installation cannot be stopped once it starts.

Do you want to continue?" is displayed. Click [Yes].

The installation of the printer driver starts.

13

The window that informs you the completion of the installation is displayed. Select [Restart my computer now], then click [Exit].

Windows restarts.

3-72 Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network

Installing from [Add Printer Wizard]

1

From the [Start] menu, select [Settings]

[Printers] to open the [Printers] folder. Then, double-click the [Add Printer] icon.

For Windows XP Professional: From the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes]

➞ [Add a printer].

For Windows XP Home Edition: From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers and Other Hardware] ➞ [Printers and Faxes] ➞[Add a printer].

For Windows Server 2003: From the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes], and then double-click [Add a printer].

The [Add Printer Wizard] dialog box is displayed.

2

Click [Next].

3

3

Select [Network printer] and click [Next].

Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network 3-73

4

Click [Next].

For Windows 98/Me, click [Browse].

3

5

Select the directory of the print server, then click [Next].

For Windows 98/Me: Proceed to Step 7.

3-74 Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network

6

Select whether or not to use this printer as the default printer, then click [Next].

3

7

Click [Finish].

NOTE

If the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box appears, click [Yes].

Installing from [Windows Explorer]

1

From the [Start] menu, select [Programs]

[Accessories]

[Windows Explorer].

For Windows XP/Server 2003: From the [Start] menu, select [All Programs] ➞

[Accessories] ➞ [Windows Explorer].

For Windows 98: From the [Start] menu, select [Programs] ➞ [Windows

Explorer].

Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network 3-75

3

2

Select the print server from [My Network Places] (from

[Network Computer] for Windows 98), then double-click the icon for this printer.

Or drag and drop the icon for this printer into the [Printers] folder.

3

The [Printers] dialog box is displayed. Follow the instructions on the screen.

3-76 Printing from a Network Computer by Sharing the Printer on a Network

Uninstalling the CAPT Software

Uninstalling removes software from your computer and restores the computer to the state before installing the software. The CAPT software can be uninstalled using the following procedure.

IMPORTANT

If the printer driver was installed into Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 logged on by a user who is a member of Administrators, it cannot be uninstalled from the computer logged on by anyone other than users who are members of Administrators. Be sure to log in as a user who is a member of Administrators before the uninstallation.

3

1

Make sure to close all the files and programs listed below:

Help files

Printer Status Window

Control Panel

Other applications

2

From the [Start] menu, select [Programs]

[Canon Printer

Uninstaller]

[Canon LBP3600 Uninstaller].

For Windows XP/Server 2003: From the [Start] menu, select [All Programs] ➞

[Canon Printer Uninstaller] ➞ [Canon LBP3600 Uninstaller].

The [Delete Printer] dialog box is displayed.

3

Select the name for this printer.

Uninstalling the CAPT Software 3-77

4

Click [Delete].

3

A confirmation message is displayed.

NOTE

Even if [Canon LBP3600] is not on the list in the [Delete Printer] dialog box, you can delete the file and information related to this printer by clicking the [Delete] button.

5

Click [Yes].

Uninstallation starts. Please wait until it is completed.

6

Click [Exit].

3-78

The [Delete Printer] dialog box closes.

NOTE

If the CAPT software cannot be uninstalled, see "When Uninstallation Fails," on p.

7-51.

Uninstalling the CAPT Software

Printing a Document

4

CHAPTER

This chapter describes the printing procedures and the functions of this printer.

Printing from the Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Job Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Specifying the Printing Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

For Windows 98/Me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9

For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13

Setting Printer Information Before Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Using the Printing Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Various Pages in the Printer Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22

Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41

Scaling Print Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43

Poster Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45

Watermark Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47

Specifying a Custom Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52

Printing Borders and Printing Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54

Selecting an Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55

Print with Mixed Paper Sizes/Orientations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57

Gutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59

Specifying the Finishing Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60

Specifying the Paper Feed Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63

Specifying the Print Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65

Grayscale Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67

Specifying Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71

PageComposer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74

Viewing the Printer Settings/Restoring the Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77

Printer Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79

Functions on the Printer Status Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-79

Displaying the Printer Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-81

Setting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-82

[Utility] Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-84

[Device Settings] Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-84

[Refresh]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85

4-1

4

4. Printing a Document

[Resolve Error] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

Displaying Status When a Print Server is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

4-2

Printing from the Application Software

After installing the CAPT software, you can now print jobs on the printer.

This section describes the procedure for printing from an application, taking Adobe

Reader 6.0 as an example.

1

Load paper in the multi-purpose tray or paper cassette. (See

"Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray," on p. 2-57, "Printing from a Paper Cassette," on p. 2-17)

2

Open the PDF file to print with Adobe Reader, and then select

[Print Setup] from the [File] menu.

4

Printing from the Application Software 4-3

3

Specify the paper size of the document and the printing orientation, then click [OK].

4

4

Select [Print] from the [File] menu.

The printer driver starts up, and the [Print] dialog box appears.

4-4 Printing from the Application Software

5

Select this printer for [Name] or [Printer Name] and specify the printing preferences.

NOTE

The printer name displayed in this dialog box can be changed in the [Printers] folder (the [Printers and Faxes] folder for Windows XP/Server 2003).

6

If you want to specify more detailed printing preferences, click

[Properties].

4

The [Canon LBP3600 Properties] dialog box is displayed.

Printing from the Application Software 4-5

NOTE

The procedure for displaying the [Printer Properties] dialog box may differ depending on the application being used.

7

Specify the printing preferences in the [Page Setup],

[Finishing], [Paper Source], and [Quality] sheets, and then click [OK].

4

The [Print] dialog box reappears.

NOTE

It is recommended that you confirm the contents of the [Page Setup] sheet and the

[Paper Source] sheet each time you print.

8

Click [OK].

The printer starts printing.

NOTE

• If you have any problems with printing, see "Chapter 7 Troubleshooting".

"Using the Printing Functions" (See p. 4-22) describes how to use the various

functions of the printer and printer driver. By specifying the settings for the printer and printer driver for each job, you can make the best use of the printer and its functions.

4-6 Printing from the Application Software

Job Operations

You can delete, pause, or resume a job in the Printer Status Window.

1

Start printing.

The Printer Status Window appears.

NOTE

The Printer Status Window may not appear depending on the settings for

[Display Printer Status Window] in the [Preferences] menu in the Printer Status

Window. (See "Setting Preferences," on p. 4-82)

2

When deleting or pausing the job, click the [Pause Job] button in the [Current Print Job] tab or [My Job Operation] tab.

4

The following message is displayed and the [My Job Operation] tab is selected on the top by clicking the [Pause Job] button in the [Current Print Job] tab.

Job Operations 4-7

3

Click the button for the desired operation from among the

[Job Operation] buttons.

4

Deleting the job

Click [ ] (Delete Job).

Pausing the job

Click [ ] (Pause Job).

Resuming the job

Click [ ] (Resume Job).

4-8 Job Operations

Specifying the Printing Preferences

The CAPT software for LBP3600 allows you to specify various printing preferences.

To specify the printing preferences, first display the [Printer Properties] dialog box or the [Document Properties] dialog box. Perform any one of the following procedures that is suitable for your operating system to display the Properties dialog boxes.

For Windows 98/Me

If you display the [Document Properties] dialog box from your application, you can specify the settings only for the job.

If you display the [Printer Properties] dialog box from the [Printers] folder, the print options and default values for all jobs can be specified.

NOTE

The [Configuration] sheet that allows you to specify the optional settings can be

displayed only by using the procedure described in "Displaying the [Printer Properties]

Dialog Box from the [Printers] Folder" (See p. 4-12).

4

Specifying the Printing Preferences 4-9

4

Displaying the [Document Properties] Dialog Box from the

Application

This section describes the procedure, taking Adobe Reader 6.0 as an example.

1

Select [Print] from the [File] menu in the application.

The [Print] dialog box is displayed.

NOTE

Printing procedures differ depending on your application. For details on the printing procedures, see the instruction manual supplied with your application.

4-10 Specifying the Printing Preferences

2

Select this printer for [Name] or [Printer Name] and click

[Properties].

The [Document Properties] dialog box is displayed.

4

Specifying the Printing Preferences 4-11

Displaying the [Printer Properties] Dialog Box from the [Printers]

Folder

1

From the [Start] menu, select [Settings]

[Printers].

4

The [Printers] folder is displayed.

2

Select the icon for this printer, then select [Properties] from the [File] menu.

4-12 Specifying the Printing Preferences

The [Printer Properties] dialog box is displayed.

NOTE

The [Printer Properties] dialog box can also be displayed by right-clicking the icon for this printer and selecting [Properties] from the pop-up menu.

For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003

If you display the [Document Properties] dialog box from your application, you can specify the settings only for the job.

If you display the [Document Properties] dialog box from the [Printers] folder or the

[Printers and Faxes] folder, you can specify the default settings for all jobs.

If you display the [Printer Properties] dialog box from the [Printers] folder or the

[Printers and Faxes] folder, you can specify the printer options and add the frequently used options as "Profiles".

NOTE

• Full Control Permission is required to specify the settings for the [Printers] folder or the

[Printers and Faxes] folder. If you cannot display the [Document Properties] dialog box from the [Printers] folder or the [Printers and Faxes] folder, display the dialog box from the application.

• The [Device Settings] sheet that allows you to specify the optional settings can be

displayed only by using the procedure described in "Displaying the [Printer Properties]

Dialog Box from the [Printers] Folder" (See p. 4-17).

4

Specifying the Printing Preferences 4-13

4

Displaying the [Document Properties] Dialog Box from the

Application

This section describes the procedure, taking Adobe Reader 6.0 as an example.

1

Select [Print] from the [File] menu in the application.

2

Confirm the printer name, then click [Properties].

4-14 Specifying the Printing Preferences

The [Document Properties] dialog box is displayed.

Displaying the [Document Properties] Dialog Box from the [Printers]

Folder

1

From the [Start] menu, select [Settings]

[Printers].

For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003: From the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].

For Windows XP Home Edition: From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], then click [Printers and Other Hardware] ➞ [Printers and Faxes].

4

The [Printers] folder or the [Printers and Faxes] folder is displayed.

Specifying the Printing Preferences 4-15

2

Select the icon for this printer, then select [Printing

Preferences] from the [File] menu.

4

The [Document Properties] dialog box is displayed.

NOTE

The [Document Properties] dialog box can also be displayed by right-clicking the icon for this printer and selecting [Printing Preferences] from the pop-up menu.

4-16 Specifying the Printing Preferences

Displaying the [Printer Properties] Dialog Box from the [Printers]

Folder

1

From the [Start] menu, select [Settings]

[Printers].

For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003: From the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].

For Windows XP Home Edition: From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], then click [Printers and Other Hardware] ➞ [Printers and Faxes].

4

The [Printers] folder or the [Printers and Faxes] folder is displayed.

2

Select the icon for this printer, then select [Properties] from the [File] menu.

Specifying the Printing Preferences 4-17

The [Printer Properties] dialog box is displayed.

4

NOTE

The [Printer Properties] dialog box can also be displayed by right-clicking the icon for this printer and selecting [Properties] from the pop-up menu.

4-18 Specifying the Printing Preferences

Setting Printer Information Before Printing

Before printing a job, specify the settings for the paper source options and duplex unit. Perform the following steps each time you install the optional accessories:

1

From the [Start] menu, select [Settings] ➞ [Printers].

For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003: From the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].

For Windows XP Home Edition: From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], then click [Printers and Other Hardware]

➞ [Printers and Faxes].

4

The [Printers] folder or the [Printers and Faxes] folder is displayed.

Setting Printer Information Before Printing 4-19

2

Select the icon for this printer, then select [Properties] from the [File] menu.

4

The [Printer Properties] dialog box is displayed.

NOTE

The [Printer Properties] dialog box can also be displayed by right-clicking the icon for this printer and selecting [Properties] from the pop-up menu.

3

Display the [Device Settings] (for Windows 2000/XP/Server

2003) or [Configuration] (for Windows 98/Me) sheet, then specify the settings in [Paper Source Options] and [Duplex

Unit].

4-20 Setting Printer Information Before Printing

NOTE

You can also obtain the printer status such as paper source options automatically by clicking [Get Device Status].

4

Click [OK].

4

Setting Printer Information Before Printing 4-21

4

Using the Printing Functions

Various Pages in the Printer Driver

The [Printer Properties] dialog box and the [Document Properties] dialog box contain the following sheets that allow you to specify the various printing functions.

You can switch among the sheets by clicking the tabs across the top of the dialog box.

This section describes the types of printing preferences that can be specified in each sheet.

For Windows 98/Me

• [Document Properties] Dialog Box

- [Page Setup] Sheet

- [Finishing] Sheet

- [Paper Source] Sheet

- [Quality] Sheet

• [Printer Properties] Dialog Box

- [General] Sheet

- [Details] Sheet

- [Sharing] Sheet

- [Page Setup] Sheet

- [Finishing] Sheet

- [Paper Source] Sheet

- [Quality] Sheet

- [Configuration] Sheet

For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003

• [Document Properties] Dialog Box

- [Page Setup] Sheet

- [Finishing] Sheet

- [Paper Source] Sheet

- [Quality] Sheet

4-22 Using the Printing Functions

• [Printer Properties] Dialog Box

- [General] Sheet

- [Sharing] Sheet

- [Ports] Sheet

- [Advanced] Sheet

- [Security] Sheet

- [Device Settings] Sheet

- [Profile] Sheet

NOTE

For more details on operations, see Online Help.

Online Help can be displayed using the following procedure. To close the displayed

Online Help, click within the Online Help window.

- Press the [Tab] key on your keyboard to select the item of which you want to display

Help, then press the [F1] key.

- Right-click the item of which you want to display Help, then click [What's This?] from the pop-up menu.

- Click [ ] (Help) on [Titlebar], move the [?]-attached cursor to the item of which you want to display Help, then click it.

[Page Setup] Sheet

The [Page Setup] sheet allows you to specify the following printing preferences:

4

Page Size

Display the [Page Size] pull-down menu, then select the desired page size by clicking it.

The page sizes that can be selected are as follows:

• Standard paper sizes (Sizes from A0 to A5; from 11 x 17 to Executive)

Using the Printing Functions 4-23

4

• Envelopes (Envelope DL, Envelope COM10, Envelope C5, Envelope Monarch,

Envelope B5)

Custom Paper Size (See p. 4-52)

NOTE

When the paper size specified in [Page Size] is larger than the size that can be loaded in the printer and [Match Page Size] is selected for [Output Size], A0, A1, and A2 sizes are printed on A3 size paper, and B1, B2, and B3 sizes are printed on B4 size paper, respectively reduced.

Output Size

Display the [Output Size] pull-down menu, then select the desired paper size.

The paper sizes that can be selected are as follows:

• Match Page Size

Standard paper sizes (Sizes from A3 to A5; from 11 x 17 to Executive)

Envelopes (Envelope DL, Envelope COM10, Envelope C5, Envelope Monarch,

Envelope B5)

Custom Paper Size (See p. 4-52)

NOTE

• When printing on paper that is of the same size as [Page Size], select [Match Page Size].

• If you select a paper size that differs from [Page Size], the print will be automatically reduced or enlarged to fit on the page.

• When printing data in which multiple paper sizes are specified in the application, you can print at the same size as you specified in [Output Size] in the printer driver.

• If you can specify the page size, print copies, and orientation in your application, you do not have to specify the settings in the [Page Setup] sheet.

Copies

Allows you to specify the number of copies to be printed.

Click the arrows for [Copies] or enter a number from the keypad. You can specify from 1 to

999 print copies.

Orientation

Allows you to select either portrait orientation or landscape orientation.

Click either [Portrait] or [Landscape] for [Orientation].

Page Layout (See p. 4-41)

• N Pages per Sheet

Multiple pages can be printed on one sheet of paper.

The number of pages that can be selected is 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 9, or 16 (Pages per Sheet).

If you select 2, 4, 6, 8, 9, or 16 (Pages per Sheet), the [Page Order] pull-down menu appears, allowing you to specify the page order.

4-24 Using the Printing Functions

• Poster

Magnifies a single page image and prints it out on several sheets of paper.

The number of pages that can be selected is 2 x 2, 3 x 3, or 4 x 4.

Manual Scaling/Page Order (See p. 4-43)

When [1 Page per Sheet] is selected for [Page Layout], [Manual Scaling] appears. When

2, 4, 6, 8, 9, or 16 (Pages per Sheet) is selected for [Page Layout], [Page Order] appears.

• Manual Scaling: The scaling is adjusted automatically when the values in [Page Size] and [Output Size] are different. If you want to specify the scale factor manually, select

[Manual Scaling], then specify the value in the spin box. You can specify from 25 to 200

%.

• Page Order: You can select the page order when printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper.

Custom Paper Size (See p. 4-52)

The dialog box shown below is displayed by clicking [Custom Paper Size].

This dialog box allows you to specify the height and width of custom paper size, which is different from the standard paper sizes.

In Windows 98/Me, up to 30 custom paper sizes can be added. In Windows 2000/XP/

Server 2003, the number depends on the system environment.

4

Watermark (See p. 4-47)

Allows you to specify whether to superimpose a watermark on the print data.

Using the Printing Functions 4-25

Edit Watermark (See p. 4-49)

The dialog box shown below is displayed by clicking [Edit Watermark].

This dialog box allows you to add new watermarks and edit the added watermarks.

4

Layout Options (See p. 4-54)

The dialog box shown below is displayed by clicking [Layout Options].

This dialog box allows you to specify borders, date, and page numbers to be printed on the printouts.

4-26 Using the Printing Functions

[Finishing] Sheet

The [Finishing] sheet allows you to specify the following printing preferences:

Print Style (See p. 4-55)

Allows you to select the print style (1-sided Printing, 2-sided Printing, or Booklet Printing).

The optional duplex unit is required for 2-sided printing and booklet printing.

Booklet (See p. 4-56)

The dialog box shown below is displayed by selecting [Booklet Printing] for [Print Style] and clicking [Booklet].

This dialog box allows you to specify the settings for booklet printing.

4

Print with Mixed Paper Sizes/Orientations (See p. 4-57)

When printing a document of mixed paper sizes or orientations, place a checkmark for

[Print with Mixed Paper Sizes/Orientations] and specify the paper alignment or gutter settings in the [Detailed Settings] dialog box.

Using the Printing Functions 4-27

Details (See p. 4-58)

The dialog box shown below is displayed by placing a checkmark for [Print with Mixed

Paper Sizes/Orientations] and clicking [Details].

This dialog box allows you to specify the paper alignment on output when printing a document of mixed paper sizes or orientations.

4

Binding Location (See p. 4-59)

You can specify which edge of the printout is bound.

Gutter (See p. 4-59)

The dialog box shown below is displayed by clicking [Gutter].

This dialog box allows you to specify the width of the gutter and image processing method.

Finishing

You can select the procedure for output from the following items:

Off: Printouts of a complete job are grouped.

Collate: Printouts of a complete job are collated.

4-28 Using the Printing Functions

Finishing Details (See p. 4-60)

The dialog box shown below is displayed by clicking [Finishing Details].

This dialog box allows you to specify the various options for job processing.

Advanced Settings (See p. 4-61)

The dialog box shown below is displayed by clicking [Advanced Settings] in the [Finishing

Details] dialog box.

This dialog box allows you to specify the finishing details.

4

[Paper Source] Sheet

You can specify the following printing preferences in the [Paper Source] sheet.

Using the Printing Functions 4-29

4

Paper Selection (See p. 4-63)

You can select the paper sources for feeding paper from the following items:

• Same Paper for All Pages

Feeds paper from the same paper source for the entire job.

• Different for First, Others, and Last

Feeds paper from different paper sources for the first page, body pages and last page.

• Different for First, Second, Others, and Last

Feeds paper from different paper sources for the first page, second page, body pages, and last page.

• Different for Cover and Others

Feeds paper from different paper sources for the cover page and body pages when printing a booklet. This item can be used only when [Booklet Printing] is selected for

[Print Style] in the [Finishing] sheet.

• Transparency Interleaving

Enables paper sheets to be placed between the transparency sheets the document is printed on. This item can be used only when either [A4] or [Letter] is selected for [Output

Size] in the [Page Setup] sheet.

Paper Source (See p. 4-63)

Specify paper source or paper type according to the settings selected in [Paper

Selection].

Paper Type

Specify the type of paper to be used.

Specify as follows:

Printer Driver

Setting

[Plain Paper]

Paper Type

Plain paper (64 - 80 g/m 2 )

[Plain Paper L] Select when paper is curled by selecting [Plain Paper].

[Heavy Paper] Heavy paper (106 - 128 g/m 2 ), Labels

[Heavy Paper L] Heavy paper (81 - 105 g/m 2 )

[Transparencies] Transparencies

* When printing envelopes, the printer automatically applies the appropriate print mode to the envelope type by specifying [Output Size] in the [Page Setup] sheet.

IMPORTANT

When printing heavy paper (81 - 90 g/m 2 ) from a cassette or performing 2-sided printing on that, perform the following settings: a Select [Plain Paper] for [Paper Type] in the [Paper Source] sheet.

b Click the [Finishing Details] button in the [Finishing] sheet and the [Advanced Settings] button in the [Finishing Details] dialog box, and then, select [Mode 4] for [Fixing Mode] in the [Advanced Settings] dialog box.

4-30 Using the Printing Functions

Pause when Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray

Specify whether the printer should pause a job and display a message or continue the job when feeding paper from the multi-purpose tray. When this option is checked, a message is displayed and the printer pauses the job. Make sure that the paper size specified in the printer driver is the same as the size of paper in the multi-purpose tray and click the

[Resolve Error] button in the Printer Status Window.

Continue Printing with the Multi-purpose Tray

Specify whether the printer should switch the paper source to the multi-purpose tray automatically when a cassette has run out of paper during a job and the paper specified in

[Output Size] in the [Page Setup] sheet is not loaded in any other cassette.

[Quality] Sheet

The [Quality] sheet allows you to specify the following printing preferences:

4

Objective (See p. 4-65)

Selecting the appropriate objective for the contents of the job allows you to perform optimum printing.

• General: Prints in the appropriate mode for printing documents or charts in a general format.

Graphics: Prints in the appropriate mode for printing graphics.

Photos: Prints in the appropriate mode for printing documents that contain photographs, graphics, and others. You can produce printed colors that are close to those on the screen.

• Designs [CAD]: Prints in the appropriate mode for printing colored thin lines. Since photographs and graphics are printed darker, the thin lines appear clearer.

• Web Pages: Prints in the appropriate mode for printing illustrations on web sites. Prints low-resolution image data that is printed rough or jagged with normal printing more smoothly.

Using the Printing Functions 4-31

Details (See p. 4-65)

The dialog box shown below is displayed by clicking [Details].

This dialog box allows you to change the printing preferences.

4

IMPORTANT

Using the Toner Save mode may decrease print density, making printed text look patchy.

Manual Grayscale Settings (See p. 4-67)

Place a checkmark when customizing the grayscale. To specify the grayscale in detail, click the [Grayscale Settings] button to display the [Grayscale Settings] dialog box.

Grayscale Settings (See p. 4-67)

The dialog box shown below is displayed by clicking [Grayscale Settings].

This dialog box has the [Grayscale Adjustment] sheet and the [Matching] sheet.

• [Grayscale Adjustment] Sheet

This sheet allows you to specify brightness and contrast for printing.

4-32 Using the Printing Functions

• [Matching] Sheet

This sheet allows you to specify the procedure for color correction for printing.

When performing color adjustment in the printer driver, the settings specified in

[Matching Method] and [Monitor Profile] will be enabled. When not performing, specify the settings for the gamma correction that performs brightness of colors.

Print Grayscale Sample (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 only)

You can print an adjusted grayscale sample after specifying the settings in the [Grayscale

Adjustment] sheet that is displayed when [Grayscale Settings] is clicked. The after-adjustment image is printed in the center of the paper, and the images whose

[Brightness] and [Contrast] are changed by graduation are each printed around the after-adjustment image.

4

Using the Printing Functions 4-33

[General] Sheet

This sheet displays the printer name. Allows you to print a test page.

4

[Details] Sheet (Windows 98/Me only)

This sheet allows you to specify the settings for the printer port, spooling, and others and add drivers.

4-34 Using the Printing Functions

[Sharing] Sheet

This sheet allows you to specify whether or not to share the printer.

NOTE

• For Windows 98/Me, the [Sharing] sheet does not appear if [File and printer sharing for

Microsoft Networks] has not been added in the network settings. (See p. 3-58)

• For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, the [Sharing] sheet does not appear if the

appropriate network settings have not been performed. (See p. 3-62)

4

[Ports] Sheet (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 only)

This sheet allows you to add, delete, and configure the printer port.

Using the Printing Functions 4-35

[Advanced] Sheet (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 only)

This sheet allows you to specify the detailed settings, such as available time of the printer and the spooling settings.

4

[Security] Sheet (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 only)

This sheet allows you to confirm the access permissions for each user.

4-36 Using the Printing Functions

[Configuration]/[Device Settings] Sheet

The [Configuration]/[Device Settings] sheet allows you to specify the paper source options, procedure for displaying the Printer Status Window, and others.

Paper Source Options (See p. 4-19)

Select the appropriate item when the optional paper feeders are installed in the printer.

Duplex Unit (See p. 4-19)

Place a checkmark when the optional duplex unit is installed in the printer.

Spooling at Host (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 only)

You can specify whether spooling is performed at the Host.

Show Icon in the Taskbar (See p. 4-81)

When this option is checked, an icon for displaying the Printer Status Window appears in the taskbar on the Windows screen.

Get Device Status

Clicking [Get Device Status] automatically obtains the printer status etc. from the printer and reflects it in the settings of the printer driver.

4

Using the Printing Functions 4-37

[Profile] Sheet (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 only)

This sheet allows you to create and add new "Profiles" and edit the added

"Profiles".

4

Profile List

Lists the available "Profiles".

Name

Displays the name of the "Profile" selected in [Profile List].

Comment

Displays a comment about the "Profile" selected in [Profile List].

4-38 Using the Printing Functions

Add (See p. 4-71)

The dialog box shown below is displayed by clicking [Add].

This dialog box allows you to enter [Name], [Icon], [Comment], and the printing preferences for the newly added "Profile" or the one that you want to edit.

Edit (See p. 4-71)

The dialog box shown below is displayed by clicking [Edit].

This dialog box allows you to enter [Name], [Icon], [Comment], and the printing preferences for the newly added "Profile" or the one that you want to edit.

4

Delete (See p. 4-71)

Allows you to delete an added "Profile".

Import (See p. 4-71)

Allows you to import a "Profile" saved as a file and add it in the printer driver.

Export (See p. 4-71)

Allows you to save an added or edited "Profile" as a file.

Using the Printing Functions 4-39

4

Allow Profile Selection

Allows you to select a "Profile" in the [Document Properties] dialog box.

Allow Setting Edition

Allows you to add a new "Profile" setting that is different from the "Profiles" previously registered in the [Document Properties] dialog box.

Preview

The current settings is displayed on Preview in the [Page Setup] sheet, the [Paper

Source] sheet, and the [Finishing] sheet. You can specify the settings for [Binding

Location], [Page Layout], [Finishing] and others by clicking Preview.

Depending on which icon at the upper left on Preview ( or ) is selected, the operating procedure of Preview differs as follows:

When is selected

You can specify [Binding Location], [Page Layout], and [Print Style] ([1-sided Printing] and

[2-sided Printing] only).

Left-clicking the edge of the document image allows you to specify [Binding Location].

The setting for [Page Layout] changes successively among [1 Page per Sheet], [2 Pages per Sheet], and [4 Pages per Sheet] by repeatedly left-clicking within the document image.

If the optional duplex unit is installed, you can switch between [1-sided Printing] and

[2-sided Printing] by left-clicking the icon at the bottom right on Preview.

Also, right-clicking on Preview selects [1 Page per Sheet [1-sided]], [2 Pages per Sheet

[1-sided]], or [4 Pages per Sheet [1-sided]]. If the optional duplex unit is installed, you can also select [1 Page per Sheet [2-sided]], [2 Pages per Sheet [2-sided]], or [4 Pages per

Sheet [2-sided]].

4-40 Using the Printing Functions

When is selected

You can specify the paper source and [Finishing].

Left-clicking the paper source image (multi-purpose tray or paper cassette image) on

Preview specifies the paper source. If you want to switch the paper source automatically according to the size or type of paper, left-click [Auto] at the bottom right on Preview.

Also, right-clicking on Preview specifies [Finishing].

If [Different for First, Others, and Last], [Different for First, Second, Others, and Last], or

[Different for Cover and Others] is selected for [Paper Selection], you can specify the paper source for each page.

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet

Multiple pages can be printed on one sheet of paper.

1

For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, display the [Device

Settings] sheet and select [Auto] from [Spooling at Host].

4

Using the Printing Functions 4-41

2

Display the [Page Setup] sheet, then select the number of the pages to be printed on one sheet from [Page Layout].

The number of pages that can be selected is 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 9, or 16 (Pages per

Sheet).

4

3

When 2, 4, 6, 8, 9, or 16 pages per sheet is selected, [Page

Order] appears. Select the desired page order.

4-42 Using the Printing Functions

NOTE

The options under the [Page Order] pull-down menu differ depending on the paper orientation or the number of pages to be printed on one sheet.

4

Confirm the settings, then click [OK].

Scaling Print Output

You can select a scale when [1 Page per Sheet] is selected for [Page Layout].

The scale factor will be adjusted automatically when [Page Size] and [Output Size] are different.

The scale factor can be specified manually.

You can specify from 25 to 200 %.

Scaling a Document Automatically

4

1

Display the [Page Setup] sheet, then specify the page size in

[Page Size].

Using the Printing Functions 4-43

4

2

Specify the paper size in [Output Size].

3

Confirm the settings, then click [OK].

The scale factor will be set automatically depending on the sizes specified in

[Page Size] and [Output Size].

Scaling a Document Manually

1

Display the [Page Setup] sheet, then specify the page size in

[Page Size].

2

Specify the paper size in [Output Size].

3

Place a checkmark for [Manual Scaling], then specify the value in the spin box.

4

Confirm the settings, then click [OK].

4-44 Using the Printing Functions

Poster Printing

You can magnify a single page image and print it out on more than one page. You can join these printouts together to make one large poster.

1

For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, display the [Device

Settings] sheet and select [Auto] from [Spooling at Host].

4

Using the Printing Functions 4-45

2

Display the [Page Setup] sheet and select [Poster (N x N)] (N =

2, 3, 4) from [Page Layout].

4

A layout image of the printout appears on Preview.

3

Confirm the settings, then click [OK].

IMPORTANT

• The printing order of the printouts (separated into multiple pages) becomes "Upper

Left to Right".

• When you perform poster printing, the watermark printing and layout options are disabled.

• When you perform poster printing, the setting for [Page Order] is disabled.

4-46 Using the Printing Functions

Watermark Printing

You can superimpose watermarks (such as "COPY", "DRAFT", etc.) over the documents created in the application. Select the desired character string from the list of the character strings registered as watermarks. Also, you can add new watermarks or edit the added watermarks by clicking [Edit Watermark] in the [Page

Setup] sheet.

Watermark Printing

1

For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, display the [Device

Settings] sheet and select [Auto] from [Spooling at Host].

4

Using the Printing Functions 4-47

2

Display the [Page Setup] sheet and place a checkmark for

[Watermark].

4

3

Select the character string to print as a watermark from the list on the right of [Watermark].

4

Confirm the settings, then click [OK].

4-48 Using the Printing Functions

Editing Watermarks

1

For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, display the [Device

Settings] sheet and select [Auto] from [Spooling at Host].

2

Display the [Page Setup] sheet, place a checkmark for

[Watermark], and then click [Edit Watermark].

4

Using the Printing Functions 4-49

4

The [Edit Watermark] dialog box is displayed.

4-50 Using the Printing Functions

3

Specify the following items as needed:

[Position]:

[Angle]:

[Name]:

[Text]:

[Font]:

[Style]:

[Size]:

[Color]:

[Border]:

[Print Style]:

[Print on First Page

Only]:

Specify the position to print the selected watermark on the document. Enter X and Y axis values between -50 and 50.

Specify the angle to print the selected watermark on the document.

Enter the name of the added watermark to be displayed for [Watermark] in the [Page Setup] sheet.

Enter the characters to be printed as the watermark.

Select the font to be used for the watermark (True

Type fonts only).

Select the font style for the watermark.

Specify the font size for the watermark.

Specify the color for the watermark. Since this printer is a monochrome printer, all the watermark colors are printed in grayscale.

Specify whether a border encloses the watermark when printed.

Select the watermark type from [Transparent] or

[Overlap].

Place a checkmark when printing the watermark only on the first page of the document.

NOTE

When adding a new watermark, click [Add].

You cannot delete the default watermarks.

4

Confirm the settings, then click [OK].

The [Page Setup] sheet reappears.

4

Using the Printing Functions 4-51

4

Specifying a Custom Paper Size

Perform the following procedure to specify a desired paper size:

NOTE

To specify a custom paper size, display the dialog box shown below.

- For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003

Display the [Document Properties] dialog box in the [Printers] folder (the [Printers and

Faxes] folder for Windows XP/Server 2003).

- For Windows 98/Me

Display the [Printer Properties] dialog box in the [Printers] folder.

1

Display the [Page Setup] sheet, then click [Custom Paper

Size].

The [Custom Paper Size Settings] dialog box is displayed.

4-52 Using the Printing Functions

2

Specify the following items as needed:

[Paper List]:

[Name of Custom

Paper Size]:

[Unit]:

[Paper Size]:

Displays the names and sizes of standard paper and added custom paper.

Enter the name of the custom paper size to be registered. Up to 31 characters can be entered.

Specify the unit (Millimeter or Inch) to be used when setting the custom paper size.

Specify the height and width of the custom paper size (Height Width). Specify the custom paper size using portrait orientation (Height Width) within valid setting values.

3

Click [Register].

NOTE

In Windows 98/Me, up to 30 custom paper sizes can be added. In Windows 2000/

XP/Server 2003, the number depends on the system environment.

4

Confirm the settings, then click [OK].

4

Using the Printing Functions 4-53

4

Printing Borders and Printing Date

You can print with borders, printing date, and/or page numbers.

1

For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, display the [Device

Settings] sheet and select [Auto] from [Spooling at Host].

2

Display the [Page Setup] sheet, then click [Layout Options].

4-54 Using the Printing Functions

The [Layout Options] dialog box is displayed.

3

Specify the following items as needed:

[Edging]:

[Print Date]:

Select the type of edging to print as a border.

Prints the date. Specify the printing position of the date from the list.

[Print User Name]: Prints the user name that is registered in the computer.

Specify the printing position of the user name from the list.

[Print Page

Number]:

Prints page numbers. Specify the printing position of the page numbers from the list.

4

4

Confirm the settings, then click [OK].

The [Page Setup] sheet reappears.

Selecting an Objective

You can select the print style (1-sided Printing, 2-sided Printing, or Booklet

Printing). The optional duplex unit is required for 2-sided printing and booklet printing.

IMPORTANT

For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, [Booklet Printing] is unavailable when [Disabled] is selected for [Spooling at Host] in the [Device Settings] sheet.

Using the Printing Functions 4-55

1

Display the [Finishing] sheet, then select [1-sided Printing],

[2-sided Printing], or [Booklet Printing] for [Print Style].

4

[1-sided Printing]: Prints on one side of paper.

[2-sided Printing]: Prints on both sides of paper using the optional duplex unit.

[Booklet Printing]: Prints booklets using the optional duplex unit. Booklet printing involves printing 2 pages on both sides of a sheet of paper in the appropriate order so that the printouts become a booklet when folded into two. To perform detailed settings for booklet printing, click the

[Booklet] button.

2

When [Booklet Printing] is selected, click [Booklet] and specify the following items as needed:

4-56 Using the Printing Functions

[Booklet Printing Method]:

[Specify Booklet Gutter]:

Specify the unit for booklet printing

(printing all pages at once or by dividing into several portions).

Place a checkmark when specifying the gutter on booklet printing. Enter the value of the distance (0 to 30 mm) from the center line (fold line) in the middle of the paper.

*The size of the image is automatically reduced so that the entire image remains in the print area.

3

Confirm the settings, then click [OK].

The [Finishing] sheet reappears.

Print with Mixed Paper Sizes/Orientations

You can specify the paper alignment on output when printing a document of mixed paper sizes or orientations.

4

1

Display the [Finishing] sheet, place a checkmark for [Print with Mixed Paper Sizes/Orientations], and then click [Details].

Using the Printing Functions 4-57

The [Detailed Settings] dialog box is displayed.

4

2

Select the paper alignment pattern for printing a document of mixed paper sizes or orientations.

Specify the following items as needed:

[Gutter]:

[Image

Processing]:

When a value is specified, a margin of white space is created on one side of the printout (This margin is called [Gutter]). The gutter is useful when binding pages. Valid gutter values range from 0 to 30 mm.

When a gutter value is specified, the print area is reduced.

When [Gutter] is specified, the position of the page image is adjusted to make room for the gutter. At this point, you can select whether to reduce the size of the image to fit the remaining space. When [Reduce and

Arrange] is selected, the size of the image is automatically reduced to adjust the page image position so that the entire image remains in the print area. When [Stagger Image with Size as-is] is selected, the page image position is adjusted without changing its size. Any part of the print image that lies outside the print area will be missing in the printout.

3

Confirm the settings, then click [OK].

The [Finishing] sheet reappears.

4-58 Using the Printing Functions

Gutter

You can specify a gutter on the printouts. Valid gutter values range from 0 to 30 mm.

When a gutter is specified, the position of the page image is adjusted to make room for the gutter. At this point, you can select whether to reduce the size of the image to fit the remaining space.

1

Display the [Finishing] sheet, specify the side on which the gutter is to be located in [Binding Location], and then click

[Gutter].

4

The [Gutter Settings] dialog box is displayed.

Using the Printing Functions 4-59

4

2

Specify the value in the spin box.

Specify the following items as needed:

[Image

Processing]:

When [Gutter] is specified, the position of the page image is adjusted to make room for the gutter. At this point, you can select whether to reduce the size of the image to fit the remaining space. When [Reduce and

Arrange] is selected, the size of the image is automatically reduced to adjust the page image position so that the entire image remains in the print area. When [Stagger Image with Size as-is] is selected, the page image position is adjusted without changing its size. Any part of the print image that lies outside the print area will be missing in the printout.

3

Confirm the settings, then click [OK].

The [Finishing] sheet reappears.

Specifying the Finishing Method

You can specify a variety of options for print processing.

1

Display the [Finishing] sheet, then click [Finishing Details].

4-60 Using the Printing Functions

The [Finishing Details] dialog box is displayed.

2

Specify the following items as needed:

[Detect Paper Size in Tray]: When this option is checked, a message appears and the job is paused if the setting for [Output Size] in the [Page

Setup] sheet for the current job is different from that for the previous job. To resume the job, click the [Resolve Error] button in the Printer Status Window or load the appropriate paper. However, for the job that takes place immediately after cycling the power or removing paper, a message does not appear, and the job uses the currently loaded paper regardless of the setting for [Output Size].

[Rotate Print Data 180

Degrees]:

Prints by rotating the image 180 degrees.

This option is useful for printing envelopes and index cards that can be fed only in specific orientations.

[Use Skip Blank Pages Mode]: When this option is checked, blank pages are not output if the job includes blank pages.

4

3

Click [Advanced Settings] in the [Finishing Details] dialog box.

Using the Printing Functions 4-61

The [Advanced Settings] dialog box is displayed.

4

4

Specify the following items as needed:

[Image Refinement]:

[Fixing Mode]:

[EMF Spooling] (Windows

2000/XP/Server 2003 only):

Specify whether to apply Image

Refinement. When Image Refinement is applied, jagged lines of text and graphics are printed smoothly.

Switch the fixing mode of the printer when the toner does not fix well. [Mode 3] enhances the toner fixing the most, and

[Mode 2] and [Mode 1] follow respectively.

[Mode 4] enhances the toner fixing the least.

Specify whether the print data is spooled in

EMF (meta file) format. When this option is checked, the data is spooled in EMF format.

[Print Last Page in 1-sided

Mode when 2-sided Printing is Set]:

When this option is checked and the last page for the 2-sided printing or booklet printing is 1-sided printing, the printer can print faster than normal 2-sided printing.

[Print on the Back of Printed

Paper from the Multi-purpose

Tray]:

Place a checkmark for this option if a paper jam occurs when printing previously printed paper.

5

Confirm the settings, then click [OK].

The [Finishing Details] dialog box reappears.

4-62 Using the Printing Functions

Specifying the Paper Feed Method

You can specify various settings for the paper feed method.

1

Display the [Paper Source] sheet.

2

Specify the following items as needed:

[Paper Selection]:

[Paper Source]:

You can specify the paper feed method.

You can specify the paper source.

Options that can be specified depend on the items selected in [Paper Selection].

· [First Page]

· [Second Page]

· [Cover Page]

· [Other Pages]

· [Last Page]

· [Interleaf Sheet]

[Paper Type]: Specify the type of paper to be used.

4

Using the Printing Functions 4-63

4

[Pause when Printing from the

Multi-purpose Tray]:

Specify whether the printer should pause a job and display a message or continue the job when feeding paper from the multi-purpose tray. When this option is checked, a message is displayed and the printer pauses the job. Make sure that the paper size specified in the printer driver is the same as the size of paper in the multi-purpose tray and click the [Resolve

Error] button in the Printer Status

Window.

[Continue Printing with the

Multi-purpose Tray]:

Specify whether the printer should switch the paper source to the multi-purpose tray automatically when a cassette has run out of paper during a job and the paper specified in [Output Size] in the

[Page Setup] sheet is not loaded in any other cassette.

3

Confirm the settings, then click [OK].

4-64 Using the Printing Functions

Specifying the Print Quality

You can perform optimum printing by simply selecting the appropriate item from

[Objective].

1

Display the [Quality] sheet, then specify the settings for

[Objective].

4

For more detailed settings, click the [Details] button.

The [Detailed Settings] dialog box is displayed.

Using the Printing Functions 4-65

4

2

Specify the following items as needed:

[B & W Halftones]:

[Print Colored Text and

Lines in Black]:

Select the display pattern of subtle gradation

(medium gradation) for black-and-white data.

Place a checkmark for this option when colored text or thin lines of CAD data etc. drop out or appear broken in printouts. You should be able to print thin lines finely.

[Enable Image Correction]: When image data such as photographic images are printed at enlarged sizes in the application, the printed images can look rough or jagged. Specify the settings for smoothing the output of low-resolution image data.

[Toner Density]: Adjust the toner density for the print data.

Adjust the density by dragging the [Toner

Density] slider from side to side.

[Use Toner Save]: By using this function, you can save toner consumption, since some parts of the data are omitted from the job.

3

Confirm the settings, then click [OK].

4-66 Using the Printing Functions

Grayscale Settings

Grayscale Settings

1

Display the [Quality] sheet, place a checkmark for [Manual

Grayscale Settings], and then click [Grayscale Settings].

4

The [Grayscale Settings] dialog box is displayed.

2

Display the [Grayscale Adjustment] sheet, then specify the following items as needed:

[Brightness]: Adjust the brightness for the print data.

Adjust the brightness by dragging the

[Brightness] slider from side to side.

Using the Printing Functions 4-67

4

[Contrast]: Adjust the contrast for the print data. Adjust the contrast by dragging the [Contrast] slider from side to side.

3

Display the [Matching] sheet, then specify the following items as needed:

[Matching Mode]:

[Matching Method]:

[Monitor Profile]:

[Gamma]:

Specify the method for color correction.

Specify which element is to be prioritized in matching.

Select the appropriate item (the Profiles registered in the computer are displayed) for the monitor or scanner in use.

When [Gamma Adjustment] is selected for

[Matching Mode], color is adjusted by brightness without performing matching.

4

Confirm the settings, then click [OK].

The [Quality] sheet reappears.

Printing Grayscale Sample (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 only)

You can print an adjusted grayscale sample after specifying the settings in the

[Grayscale Adjustment] sheet. The after-adjustment image is printed in the center of the paper, and the images whose [Brightness] and [Contrast] are changed by graduation are each printed around the after-adjustment image. This is useful to adjust the grayscale of the printout.

4-68 Using the Printing Functions

1

For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, display the [Device

Settings] sheet and select [Auto] from [Spooling at Host].

2

Display the [Quality] sheet, place a checkmark for [Manual

Grayscale Settings], and then click [Grayscale Settings].

4

Using the Printing Functions 4-69

3

Specify the items in the [Grayscale Settings] dialog box as needed, then click [OK].

4

Go back to the [Quality] sheet and place a checkmark for

[Print Grayscale Sample].

4

5

Confirm the settings, then click the [OK] button.

IMPORTANT

When printing a grayscale sample, be sure that [1 Page per Sheet] is selected for

[Page Layout] in the [Page Setup] sheet.

6

Click [OK] or [Print].

The grayscale sample is printed.

IMPORTANT

When you are finished with printing grayscale samples, remove the checkmark from [Print Grayscale Sample].

4-70 Using the Printing Functions

Specifying Profiles

You can save or import all the printing preferences specified in the [Page Setup],

[Finishing], [Paper Source], and [Quality] sheets at once. You can also add, edit or select the settings.

Save the printing preferences as a "Profile" using the following procedure.

Make sure that any one of the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source] and

[Quality] sheets is displayed, then perform the following procedure.

NOTE

• For Windows 98/Me, up to 50 "Profiles" can be added. To add up to 50 "Profiles" for each user account, double-click [My Computer] ➞ [Control Panel] ➞ [Passwords] to display the [User Profiles] sheet, and then select [Users can customize their preferences and desktop settings. Windows switches to your personal settings when you log on.].

• For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, up to 50 "Profiles" for each user account can be added.

• If the printer name has been changed, any saved "Profiles" cannot be imported. To import the saved "Profiles", change the printer name to its previous one.

• Uninstallation of the printer driver does not delete the Profile information. The "Profiles" become available after re-installing the printer driver.

• The Profile information file saved on Windows 98/Me cannot be used on Windows 2000/

XP/Server 2003 and vice versa.

• Selecting a "Profile" does not change the setting for [Page Size].

Adding a Profile

4

1

Click [ ] (Add Profile).

The [Add Profile] dialog box is displayed.

Using the Printing Functions 4-71

2

Enter the name of the "Profile" for [Name].

[Icon] allows you to select the icon for the "Profile". Enter any comments in

[Comment] as needed.

4

NOTE

Up to 31 characters for [Name] and 255 characters for [Comment] can be entered.

Confirming the Printer Settings

Click [View Settings].

When [OK] is clicked, the [Add Profile] dialog box reappears.

4-72 Using the Printing Functions

3

Click [OK].

The Properties dialog box reappears.

Check if the name of the added "Profile" is on the [Profile] list.

Editing/Deleting a Profile

You can change or save the Profile information or delete it from [Profile List].

1

Click [ ] (Edit Profile).

4

The [Edit Profile] dialog box is displayed.

2

Edit the Profile information.

Using the Printing Functions 4-73

4

Editing a Profile

You can change the settings for [Name], [Icon], and [Comment].

By clicking [ ] or [ ], you can change the order of the selected "Profile".

When [Import] is clicked, the Profile information is imported from the previously saved file.

When [Export] is clicked, the selected Profile information is saved into the file.

The "Profile" saved in the file can be used again even if it is deleted from the list.

When [Apply Settings from Application] is checked, the settings for [Page Size],

[Orientation], and [Copies] specified in the application are applied for printing.

The settings for these items in the application stay enabled even if the Profile is changed.

Deleting a Profile

When [Delete] is clicked, the "Profile" is deleted from the list.

IMPORTANT

You can delete only custom "Profiles". You cannot delete default "Profiles". Also, you cannot delete the "Profile" currently selected in each sheet.

PageComposer

You can combine two jobs into one and change job settings for the combined job.

You can edit a job in another application.

You can also preview the job.

Make sure that any one of the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], or [Quality] sheet is displayed in the [Document Properties] dialog box, then perform the following procedure:

4-74 Using the Printing Functions

1

Select [Edit and Preview] from the list on the right of the

[Profile] list.

2

The message that the output method is going to be switched to the [Edit and Preview] mode is displayed. Click [OK].

4

Using the Printing Functions 4-75

3

Specify the printing preferences in each sheet, then click

[OK].

4

4

Click [OK] or [Print].

The [Canon PageComposer] dialog box is displayed and the job is displayed on a list.

5

Repeat Step 1 to 4 for the jobs that you want to edit.

6

Edit the jobs on the list in the [Canon PageComposer] dialog box.

4-76 Using the Printing Functions

NOTE

• For more details on the setting procedures for the [Canon PageComposer] dialog box, see Help for Canon PageComposer.

• When the [Edit and Preview] mode is selected in the [Printer Properties] dialog box and [ ] (Lock) is set, the [Canon PageComposer] dialog box appears each time you print.

Viewing the Printer Settings/Restoring the Default

Settings

You can view or restore the default settings for all the printing preferences specified in the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], [Quality], and [Configuration]/

[Device Settings] sheets at once.

Make sure that any one of the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source] and

[Quality] sheets is displayed, then perform the following procedure.

NOTE

A preview of the settings is displayed on each sheet. This allows you to confirm the print image on Preview.

Viewing the Printer Settings

4

1

Click [View Settings].

Using the Printing Functions 4-77

The [View Settings] dialog box is displayed.

4

By clicking the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], [Quality], or

[Configuration]/[Device Settings] tab, you can view the printing preferences for each sheet in a list.

2

Click [OK].

The previous sheet reappears.

Restoring the Default Settings

To restore the default settings, click [Restore Defaults].

You can restore the default settings only in the same sheet or dialog box as

[Restore Defaults] displayed.

The settings in the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], [Quality] and

[Configuration]/[Device Settings] sheets cannot be restored all at once to the default settings.

4-78 Using the Printing Functions

Printer Status Window

The Printer Status Window shows the printer status of LBP3600 (such as the operation status and job information) with messages, animations, sounds, and icons.

NOTE

To activate a sound, your computer must have a PCM synthesizer, and have the driver for

PCM synthesizer installed.

Functions on the Printer Status Window

The functions on the Printer Status Window are the same on both Windows 98/Me and Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003.

For more details on operations, see Online Help.

4

Menu Bar

Icon

Message Area

Animation Area

Refresh Button

Message Area (Auxiliary)

Resolve Error Button

Status Bar

Current Print Job Tab My Job Operation Tab

Job Information Area Pause Job Button

Progress Bar

Job Information Area Job Operation Button

Job Status Message Area

Printer Status Window 4-79

4

Menu Bar

Job Menu

Options Menu

Help Menu

Performs a job operation (pause, resume, or delete).

Also, when a job is paused for some reason, you can resume the job by selecting [Resolve Error]. The current job for which you have no access permission is grayed out.

Allows you to specify the environment settings for the

Printer Status Window, cleans the fixing roller etc., and adjusts the printing position.

Displays Online Help.

Other Functions

Icon

Message Area

Resolve Error Button

Displays the current printer status.

Displays the current printer status with a short message.

Message Area (Auxiliary) Displays additional information when an error occurs, etc.

Animation Area Shows an animated graphic indicating the current printer status. The graphic background changes from blue (normal) to orange when some user action is required, or to red when a Warning is issued.

Refresh Button Obtains the printer status and refreshes the Printer

Status Window display.

Allows you to resume a job when the job is paused for some reason.

Current Print Job Tab

My Job Operation Tab

Progress Bar:

Indicates the progress of the current job by showing the number of printed pages or changing graphic background.

Pause Job Button:

Pauses the job temporarily.

Job Information Area:

Displays the document name, user name, and computer name for the job.

Job Status Message Area:

Displays a message about the status of the job.

Job Operation Button:

Performs a job operation (pause, resume, or delete).

The current job for which you have no access permission is grayed out.

4-80 Printer Status Window

Status Bar

Job Information Area:

Displays the document name, user name, computer name, and status of the job.

Indicates how the printer is connected (Local or

Network).

Instructions for operating the menu are displayed during menu operation.

Displaying the Printer Status Window

There are the following two ways to display the Printer Status Window:

• Start up by clicking [ ] (Display Printer Status Window) in locations such as in the [Page Setup] sheet in the [Printer Properties] dialog box.

4

• Display the [Printer Properties] dialog box and display the [Configuration]/[Device

Settings] sheet, and then place a checkmark for [Show Icon in the Taskbar]. The icon for the Printer Status Window is displayed in the Windows taskbar. Click the icon, then click [Canon LBP3600] to start up.

The Printer Status Window appears automatically during printing or when an error occurs. If [When Starting Printing] is not selected in the [Preferences] dialog box in the [Options] menu, the Printer Status Window does not appear during printing.

Printer Status Window 4-81

4

Setting Preferences

The Preferences menu allows you to display the Printer Status Window automatically, specify the sound settings, and make the Printer Status Window monitor the printer status.

[Display Printer Status Window] Group

• When Starting Printing

The Printer Status Window appears automatically each time print starts.

• Only when Errors Occur

The Printer Status Window appears automatically only when an error occurs during printing.

• Not Display Automatically

The Printer Status Window does not appear automatically.

• Always Display on Top

The Printer Status Window is always on top of all the other windows on the desktop.

[Monitor Printer Status] Group

• Only while Displaying Printer Status Window

The Printer Status Window monitors the printer status only while it is displayed.

• Only while Printing

The Printer Status Window monitors the printer status only while printing.

• Always

The Printer Status Window always monitors the printer status.

• Notify the Printer of the Time

If [Always] is selected, the time specified in your computer is reported to the printer by placing a checkmark for [Notify the Printer of the Time]. Place a checkmark when the optional network board cannot obtain the time from the NTP server.

[Tone Settings] Group

• Enabled All

A sound is played with a message displayed.

• Enable only when Error Occurs

A sound is played only when an error occurs.

• Disabled

No sound is played.

4-82 Printer Status Window

1

Select [Preferences] from the [Options] menu.

The [Preferences] dialog box is displayed.

2

Confirm each of the settings, then click [OK].

4

NOTE

For detailed information on operations for the Printer Status Window, see Online

Help.

Printer Status Window 4-83

4

[Utility] Menu

The [Utility] menu cleans the fixing roller etc. and prints the printer status.

Cleaning 1

Cleans the fixing roller of the printer. Clean it when the front or back of printouts has

smudge marks. For more details, see "Cleaning the Fixing Roller," on p. 5-21.

Cleaning 2

Cleans the transfer roller and photosensitive drum. Clean them after replacing the toner

cartridge or when the print quality deteriorates. For more details, see "Cleaning the

Transfer Roller and Photosensitive Drum," on p. 5-26.

Printer Status Print

Prints the optional settings of the printer, the settings for [Device Settings] in the [Options] menu, and the current printer status such as the total number of printouts. For more

details, see "Confirming the Printer Features," on p. 7-60.

Network Status Print

Prints the version of the optional network board or TCP/IP settings. For more details, see

"Chapter 4 Troubleshooting" in Network Guide.

Printing Position Adjustment Print

Display the [Printing Position Adjustment Print] dialog box. Select the paper source of which you want to check the printing position in the [Printing Position Adjustment Print] dialog box, print the position adjustment page, and then check the printing position. For

more details, see "Adjusting the Printing Position," on p. 5-28.

[Device Settings] Menu

You can specify the settings related to printer troubles, such as alleviating a flickering phenomenon during printing and adjusting the printing position.

2-sided Special Mode

Place a checkmark for this option if paper jams occur frequently during 2-sided printing.

Printing speed will be slower than when performing regular 2-sided printing.

Graphics Special Mode

Dots may appear over the images when printing graphics data that contains many halftones. In this case, place a checkmark for this option. When printing text data, smudge marks of spattering toner may appear around the text. In this case, remove the checkmark.

4-84 Printer Status Window

Lighten Flicker Mode

Place a checkmark for this option when computer screens or fluorescent lights near the printer flicker during printing (flickering phenomenon). The flickering phenomenon can be alleviated.

Print Position Adjustment

Check the printing position with the position alignment page that is output in [Printing

Position Adjustment Print] in [Utility] in the [Options] menu and adjust the printing position

with this option (moves in the horizontal direction only). For more details, see "Adjusting the Printing Position," on p. 5-28.

[Refresh]

Selecting [Refresh] from the [Options] menu obtains the latest printer status and refreshes the Printer Status Window display.

You can obtain the same result by clicking [ ] (Refresh) in the Printer Status

Window.

[Resolve Error]

When a job is paused for some reason, you can resume the job by selecting

[Resolve Error] from the [Job] menu. Resuming a job by selecting [Resolve Error] may cause unexpected print results. [Resolve Error] is unavailable in any of the following cases:

• When the job is paused due to printer error such as a paper jam and paper-out condition

• When another user's job is paused ([Resolve Error] is available in the print server if the printer is shared on a network)

You can obtain the same result by clicking [

Status Window.

] (Resolve Error) in the Printer

IMPORTANT

If a message that says "Insufficient Disk Space" is displayed, delete unnecessary files, then select [Resolve Error].

Displaying Status When a Print Server is Used

The status of a network printer can be displayed on the client's Printer Status

Window as well as on the print server's.

If the print server is not running when the Printer Status Window starts up, the status will appear automatically when the print server starts up.

4

Printer Status Window 4-85

4

• Printer Status of the Print Server

- Displaying the Printer Status Window and Job Operation

[Current Print Job] Tab

[Job

Information

Area]

[Pause

Job]

Button

[My Job Operation] Tab

[Job

Information

Area]

[Job

Operation]

Buttons

Job Operation

Displays the first job

Enabled* 1

Displays the first job* 2

Enabled

Pause Job: Pauses all the jobs

Resume Job: Resumes all the jobs

Delete Job: Deletes the first job

* 1 The [My Job Operation] tab is displayed by clicking the [Pause Job] button.

* 2 If any job is printed by the computer as the print server, the job is displayed.

- Plays a sound.

- If the print server is running Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, the status is not displayed when no one is logged on.

• Client's Printer Status

- Displaying the Printer Status Window and Job Operation

[Current Print Job] Tab

[Job

Information

Area]

[Pause Job]

Button

[My Job Operation] Tab

[Job

Information

Area]

Displays the first job in the print server

When your job is displayed in [Job

Information Area]:

Enabled*

When another user's job is displayed in [Job

Information Area]:

Disabled

Displays your first job

[Job

Operation]

Buttons

Enabled

Job Operation

Pause Job: Pauses all your jobs

Resume Job: Resumes all your jobs

Delete Job: Deletes your first job

* The [My Job Operation] tab is displayed by clicking the [Pause Job] button.

- You cannot use the [Resolve Error] button when another user's job is paused.

- While another user's job is being printed, the progress bar is displayed in gray.

- A sound is played only from the client whose user name is verified by the print server.

NOTE

To display the status for a job that is requested via a network, an environment in which the TCP/IP protocol can be used is required.

4-86 Printer Status Window

Routine Maintenance

This chapter describes the procedures for maintaining the printer such as replacing the cartridges and cleaning the printer.

5

CHAPTER

Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

When a Message Appears. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

Using Up Toner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3

Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8

Precautions for Handling Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Storing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Cleaning the Fixing Roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Cleaning the Transfer Roller and Photosensitive Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Adjusting the Printing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Checking the Printing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Adjusting the Printing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Cleaning the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Moving the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Handling the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Precautions for Handling the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45

Precaution for Storing the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

5-1

Replacing the Toner Cartridge

5

This section describes how to replace or handle a toner cartridge and precautions on storing it.

When a Message Appears

Toner cartridge is a consumable product. When a toner cartridge has reached its lifetime, a message will appear in the Printer Status Window. Take measurements according to the message.

M e s s ag e

The toner cartridge may need to be replaced soon.

D i s p l aye d T i m i n g

When lifetime of toner cartridge has been reached

C o n t e n t s a n d R e m e d i e s

· Job can be continued.

· Have a new toner cartridge available.

· It is recommended that you replace the toner cartridge with a new one before printing a large amount.

IMPORTANT

If the printout becomes faint or inconsistent, the reason is that the life of the toner cartridge has been reached even when a message does not appear. Do not continue to use the toner cartridge and replace it with new one when there is deterioration in print quality.

NOTE

The cartridge designed for this printer (EP-66 Cartridge) has a life span of up to approximately 10,000 sheets of A4 size paper when loaded in landscape orientation.

This is based on printing typical word processing documents that have about 5% page coverage with the print density set to the default setting. The life of your cartridge may vary depending on the type of documents printed. If your average document contains a lot of graphics, tables, or charts, the life of the toner cartridge will be shorter as they consume more toner.

5-2 Replacing the Toner Cartridge

Using Up Toner

If the message appears, perform the following procedure before replacing the toner cartridge. The message may disappear, and you may be able to print for a while until toner runs out completely.

WARNING

• There are some areas inside the printer which are subject to high-voltages.

When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the printer, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the printer, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.

• The toner cartridge generates a low level magnetic field. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please move away from the toner cartridge and consult your physician.

CAUTION

• Take care not to allow the toner to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.

• The fixing unit inside the printer may become hot during use. When replacing fixing unit, do not touch the fixing unit, as doing so may result in burns or electrical shock.

5

Replacing the Toner Cartridge 5-3

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the high-voltage contacts inside the toner cover, as this may result in damage to the printer.

High-voltage contacts

5

1

Open the multi-purpose tray.

Holding the grip at the center of the printer, open the multi-purpose tray.

NOTE

If you are using the multi-purpose tray, remove any loaded paper.

5-4 Replacing the Toner Cartridge

2

Open the toner cover.

Press the green toner cover release button as shown in the figure a.

a

Holding the green tab, open the toner cover until it clicks b.

Tab b

5

Replacing the Toner Cartridge 5-5

3

Pull out the toner cartridge partially by holding the grip, and then remove the cartridge with both hands as shown in the figure.

5

4

Hold the toner cartridge as shown in the figure, and gently shake it 5 or 6 times to evenly distribute the toner inside.

Be careful not to spill the toner.

IMPORTANT

• If toner is not distributed evenly, this may result in deterioration in print quality.

• Be sure to shake the toner cartridge gently; otherwise, the toner may spill out.

5-6 Replacing the Toner Cartridge

5

Hold the toner cartridge as shown in the figure and install it in the printer.

Align the projections on each side of the toner cartridge with the toner cartridge guides inside the printer. Push the toner cartridge completely into the printer.

IMPORTANT

Before inserting the toner cartridge, open the toner cover completely. The toner cartridge cannot be inserted when the toner cover is opened only partially.

6

Close the toner cover.

Holding the center of the toner cover, close the cover until it clicks.

5

IMPORTANT

• If you cannot close the toner cover, check if the toner cartridge is installed properly.

If you try to close the toner cover forcefully, this may result in damage to the printer.

• Do not leave the toner cover open for a long time after installing the toner cartridge.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge 5-7

7

Close the multi-purpose tray.

5

IMPORTANT

If you cannot close the multi-purpose tray, check if the toner cover is completely closed. If you try to close the multi-purpose tray forcefully, this may result in damage to the printer.

If the message does not disappear or the print is too thin even after performing the operation above, replace the toner cartridge with a new one.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge

Perform the following procedure to clean the transport roller and its surroundings, and then replace the toner cartridge with a new one.

WARNING

• Do not burn or throw a used toner cartridge into open flames, as this may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridge to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.

• There are some areas inside the printer which are subject to high-voltages.

When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the printer, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the printer, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.

• The toner cartridge generates a low level magnetic field. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please move away from the toner cartridge and consult your physician.

CAUTION

• Take care not to allow the toner to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.

5-8 Replacing the Toner Cartridge

• The fixing unit inside the printer may become hot during use. When replacing fixing unit, do not touch the fixing unit, as doing so may result in burns or electrical shock.

IMPORTANT

• Use only the toner cartridge designed for this printer.

• Do not touch the high-voltage contacts inside the toner cover, as this may result in damage to the printer.

High-voltage contacts

5

Replacing the Toner Cartridge 5-9

1

Open the multi-purpose tray.

Holding the grip at the center of the printer, open the multi-purpose tray.

5

NOTE

If you are using the multi-purpose tray, remove any loaded paper.

2

Open the toner cover.

Press the green toner cover release button as shown in the figure a.

a

5-10 Replacing the Toner Cartridge

Holding the green tab, open the toner cover until it clicks b.

Tab b

3

Pull out the toner cartridge partially by holding the grip, and then remove the cartridge with both hands as shown in the figure.

5

Replacing the Toner Cartridge 5-11

5

4

Using a slightly dampened cloth with water, wipe off chipped paper and toner that are attached to the transparent sheet, silver transport roller and their surroundings.

After wiping off the dirt, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.

Do not touch the black transfer roller.

Transport roller

Sheet

WARNING

Clean the printer using a slightly dampened cloth with water. Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. If flammable substances come into contact with a high-voltage area inside the printer, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.

IMPORTANT

• Do not touch the black transfer roller. This may result in deterioration in print quality.

• Be careful not to scratch the transparent sheet or peel it by force.

• Do not use a cleaning agent such as mild detergent.

• Be sure that no water or chipped paper is remaining on the transparent sheet or transport roller.

• Be sure to finish with wiping with a dry cloth. Water remaining inside the printer may result in damage to the printer.

• Do not touch the transport roller. This may result in misfeeds.

5-12 Replacing the Toner Cartridge

5

Take a new toner cartridge out of the protective bag.

Use scissors to open the protective bag so as not to damage the toner cartridge.

IMPORTANT

Keep the protective bag for the toner cartridge. This may be required after taking out the toner cartridge for printer maintenance.

6

Remove the tapes and packing materials attached to the toner cartridge.

Remove the tapes that are securing the packing materials a.

5 a a

Replacing the Toner Cartridge 5-13

5

Remove the packing materials by hooking your fingers into the tabs and pulling them out straight b.

b b

IMPORTANT

• Do not touch the photosensitive drum in the toner cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if you touch or damage the drum.

• Dispose of the packing materials according to local regulations.

7

Hold the toner cartridge as shown in the figure, and gently shake it 5 or 6 times to evenly distribute the toner inside.

IMPORTANT

• If toner is not distributed evenly, this may result in deterioration in print quality. Be sure to carry out this procedure properly.

• Be sure to shake the toner cartridge gently; otherwise, the toner may spill out.

5-14 Replacing the Toner Cartridge

8

Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface, then remove the tape that is securing the sealing tape.

9

Pull out the sealing tape (approx. 70 cm in length) gently while supporting the toner cartridge.

To pull out the sealing tape, hold the end of it and pull it out straight.

5

CAUTION

If the sealing tape is pulled out forcefully or stopped at midpoint, toner may spill out. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge 5-15

IMPORTANT

• Do not pull the sealing tape diagonally, upwards, or downwards. If the tape is severed, it may become difficult to pull out completely.

5

• Pull out the sealing tape completely from the toner cartridge. If any tape remains in the toner cartridge, this may result in poor print quality.

• When pulling out the sealing tape, be careful not to hold the drum protective shutter with your hands.

Drum protective shutter

• Dispose of the sealing tape according to local regulations.

5-16 Replacing the Toner Cartridge

10

Hold the toner cartridge as shown in the figure and install it in the printer.

Align the projections on each side of the toner cartridge with the toner cartridge guides inside the printer. Push the toner cartridge completely into the printer.

IMPORTANT

Before inserting the toner cartridge, open the toner cover completely. The toner cartridge cannot be inserted when the toner cover is opened only partially.

11

Close the toner cover.

Holding the center of the toner cover, close the cover until it clicks.

5

IMPORTANT

• If you cannot close the toner cover, check if the toner cartridge is installed properly.

If you try to close the toner cover forcefully, this may result in damage to the printer.

• Do not leave the toner cover open for a long time after installing the toner cartridge.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge 5-17

12

Close the multi-purpose tray.

5

IMPORTANT

If you cannot close the multi-purpose tray, check if the toner cover is completely closed. If you try to close the multi-purpose tray forcefully, this may result in damage to the printer.

Precautions for Handling Toner Cartridges

The toner cartridge consists of delicate parts. Handling the toner cartridge without due care may lead to damage to the toner cartridge or deterioration in print quality.

Be careful of the following points when removing or installing the toner cartridge.

WARNING

• Do not burn or throw a used toner cartridge into open flames, as this may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridge to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.

• The toner cartridge generates a low level magnetic field. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please move away from the toner cartridge and consult your physician.

CAUTION

Take care not to allow the toner to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.

IMPORTANT

• Do not expose the toner cartridge to direct sunlight or strong light.

• Keep the toner cartridge away from products that generate magnetic waves, such as a display or computer.

5-18 Replacing the Toner Cartridge

• A toner cartridge is a magnetic product. Keep the toner cartridge away from products that may be damaged by magnetic waves, such as a floppy disk or disk drive. This may lead to damage to data.

• If you take the toner cartridge out of the printer for removing paper jams or servicing the printer, place the toner cartridge into the original protective bag, or wrap it with a thick cloth immediately.

• Print quality may deteriorate if you touch or damage the photosensitive drum inside the toner cartridge. Be careful not to touch the drum or open the drum protective shutter. Be careful not to hold or touch areas that are not described in this procedure. This may result in damage to the printer.

Drum protective shutter

• When handling the toner cartridge, hold it properly by holding the grip with one hand while holding the cartridge with the other as shown in the figure. Do not set it vertically or upside-down.

5

Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the toner cartridge.

Condensation may form in and on a toner cartridge if it is brought into an environment that exposes it to sudden changes in temperature and/or humidity. If you move the cartridge to a location that is warmer or has higher humidity, keep the toner cartridge in its protective bag and store it in the new location for 2 hours or longer to allow it to adjust to the new temperature.

Be sure to use a new toner cartridge within the expiration date indicated on the package.

Using a genuine Canon toner cartridge is recommended.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge 5-19

5

Storing the Toner Cartridge

Be careful of the following points when storing a new toner cartridge or handling a toner cartridge that has been taken out of the printer for maintenance or moving the printer.

IMPORTANT

• Do not take a new toner cartridge out of the protective bag until it is ready to be used.

• If you take the toner cartridge out of the printer for servicing the printer or other purposes, place the toner cartridge into the original protective bag, or wrap it with a thick cloth immediately.

• Do not place it vertically or upside-down. Store the toner cartridge in the same orientation as when installed in the printer.

• Do not store the toner cartridge in a place exposed to direct sunlight.

• Do not store a cartridge in a hot or humid place, or a place where the temperature and humidity can change significantly.

Storing temperature range: 0 to 35 °C (32 to 95 °F)

Storing humidity range: 35 to 85 % RH (no condensation)

• Do not store the toner cartridge in a place where corrosive gases, such as ammonia, are generated, or where a considerable amount of salt is contained in the air, or where there is a lot of dust.

• Keep the toner cartridge out of the reach of small children.

Condensation

Even within the storable humidity range, water droplets may develop both inside and outside of the toner cartridge due to the difference in temperature. The development of water droplets is called condensation. Condensation will adversely affect the quality of the toner cartridge.

5-20 Replacing the Toner Cartridge

Cleaning the Fixing Roller

When the front or back of printouts has smudge marks, clean the fixing roller using the following procedure. Print quality deterioration can be prevented by cleaning the fixing roller. First, print out a cleaning page using A4 size paper as shown in the figure. Then, clean the fixing roller by feeding the cleaning page from the multi-purpose tray and delivering it to the output tray.

IMPORTANT

• A cleaning page cannot be printed on other than A4 size paper. Be sure to use A4 size paper.

• If A4 size paper is not loaded in the paper cassette, load it in landscape orientation in the multi-purpose tray.

5

Cleaning the Fixing Roller 5-21

1

Display the Printer Status Window.

For details on procedures for displaying the Printer Status Window, see "Printer

Status Window," on p. 4-79.

5

2

From the [Options] menu, select [Utility]

[Cleaning 1].

5-22 Cleaning the Fixing Roller

3

Click [OK].

The message, "Now printing a cleaning page." is displayed, and the cleaning page is printed.

NOTE

If A4 size paper is not loaded in any paper source, a message that prompts you to replace paper appears. Load A4 size paper in the multi-purpose tray.

4

Open the multi-purpose tray.

Holding the grip at the center of the printer, open the multi-purpose tray.

5

5

Raise the paper retaining lever.

Cleaning the Fixing Roller 5-23

6

Align the paper guide with A4.

EXEC

11x17

LTR

LGL A5 B4

B5

A3

A4

5

7

Load the cleaning page with the printed side facing down and the arrow mark going into the multi-purpose tray first.

5-24 Cleaning the Fixing Roller

8

Lower the paper retaining lever.

The paper is sent into the printer slowly to start cleaning the fixing roller.

NOTE

• Cleaning takes approximately 2 minutes.

The cleaning process cannot be canceled. Please wait until it is completed.

When the front or back of printouts has smudge marks even after performing the procedure above, perform [Cleaning 1] again.

5

Cleaning the Fixing Roller 5-25

5

Cleaning the Transfer Roller and Photosensitive Drum

When the print quality deteriorates, clean the transfer roller and photosensitive drum of the printer using the following procedure. By cleaning them, you can prevent poor print quality.

IMPORTANT

If the transfer roller and photosensitive drum are cleaned frequently, it may decrease their life span.

1

Display the Printer Status Window.

For details on procedures for displaying the Printer Status Window, see "Printer

Status Window," on p. 4-79.

5-26 Cleaning the Transfer Roller and Photosensitive Drum

2

From the [Options] menu, select [Utility]

[Cleaning 2].

3

Click [OK].

The message "Cleaning" is displayed in the Printer Status Window, and cleaning of the transfer roller and photosensitive starts.

NOTE

• Cleaning takes approximately 15 seconds.

• The cleaning process cannot be canceled. Please wait until it is completed.

5

Cleaning the Transfer Roller and Photosensitive Drum 5-27

Adjusting the Printing Position

5

If the printing position is skewed when printing from a certain paper source, you can adjust the position from the Printer Status Window.

IMPORTANT

If any part of the print image lies outside the printable area after adjusting the printing position, the part will be missing in the printout.

NOTE

Be aware when adjusting the printing position for 2-sided printing, since the orientation of the images on the reverse pages in 2-sided printing varies depending on the printing orientation or setting for [Binding Location] in the [Finishing] sheet.

Checking the Printing Position

Perform the printing position adjustment print and check the position to be adjusted.

1

Display the Printer Status Window.

For details on procedures for displaying the Printer Status Window, see "Printer

Status Window," on p. 4-79.

5-28 Adjusting the Printing Position

2

From the [Options] menu, select [Utility]

[Printing Position

Adjustment Print].

The [Printing Position Adjustment Print] dialog box is displayed.

3

In the [Printing Position Adjustment Print] dialog box, select the paper source of which you want to check the printing position.

Place a checkmark for [Check Duplex Unit Also] when adjusting the printing position for 2-sided printing.

5

Adjusting the Printing Position 5-29

4

Click [OK].

5

The printing position adjustment print is printed as shown below. The arrow points the top edge of the printing position adjustment print.

Next, check the printout results and specify the position to be adjusted in "Adjusting the

Printing Position" (See p. 5-30).

Adjusting the Printing Position

The measurements of printed on paper are as below:

10 mm

5 mm

*5 mm from each edge of paper (10 mm for envelopes)

5-30 Adjusting the Printing Position

As an example, the setting procedure after printing the following printing position adjustment print by selecting [Cassette 1] for [Paper Source] in the [Printing

Position Adjustment Print] dialog box is described here.

In this case, adjust the printing position -5.0 mm to the left.

NOTE

The printing position can be adjusted within a range from +5.0 to -5.0 mm (in the horizontal direction only).

1

Display the Printer Status Window.

For details on procedures for displaying the Printer Status Window, see "Printer

Status Window," on p. 4-79.

5

Adjusting the Printing Position 5-31

2

Select [Device Settings] from the [Options] menu.

5 The [Device Settings] dialog box is displayed.

3

Adjust the printing position in [Print Position Adjustment] in the [Device Settings] dialog box.

Next, check the printout results of the printing position adjustment print and select the numerical value to adjust the position. The printing position can be adjusted within a range from -5.0 to 5.0 mm. The position is moved by the entered value. Negative values move the position to the left and positive values to the right.

NOTE

The printing position can be adjusted in 0.5 mm increments.

5-32 Adjusting the Printing Position

4

Click [OK].

5

From the [Options] menu, select [Utility]

[Printing Position

Adjustment Print].

5

The [Printing Position Adjustment Print] dialog box is displayed.

Adjusting the Printing Position 5-33

6

In the [Printing Position Adjustment Print] dialog box, select the paper source of which you checked the printing position.

5

7

Click [OK].

The printing position adjustment print in which the setting is changed is printed.

Check the printout results to confirm the printing position.

To make further adjustment, repeat step 1 to 7.

5-34 Adjusting the Printing Position

Cleaning the Printer

Periodically clean the outer surfaces and ventilation slots of the printer to keep the print quality high. When cleaning the printer, be careful of the following points in order to prevent an electrical shock or printer malfunctions.

WARNING

• When cleaning the printer, turn OFF the main power switch, then unplug the power plug. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable substances.

Check detergent for flammability prior to use. If flammable substances come into contact with a high-voltage area inside the printer, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.

IMPORTANT

• Be careful not to use a cleaning agent other than water or a mild detergent diluted with water, as this may deform or crack the plastic materials in the printer.

When using a mild detergent, be sure to dilute it with water.

Grease or oil does not have to be applied to this printer. Be sure not to apply grease or oil.

5

1

Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer OFF a , then unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet b .

OFF

ON a b

Cleaning the Printer 5-35

2

Firmly wring a soft cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted with water, and wipe off the dirt.

If you use a mild detergent for cleaning, be sure to wipe away the detergent with a soft cloth dampened with water.

5

3

After wiping off the dirt, wipe the printer with a dry cloth.

4

When the printer is completely dry, plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.

5-36 Cleaning the Printer

Moving the Printer

When changing the location of the printer or moving the printer for maintenance, be sure to perform the following procedure.

WARNING

Be sure that the power is turned OFF, the power cord is unplugged, and all interface cables are disconnected from the printer before moving the printer.

Otherwise, the power cord or interface cables may be damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.

CAUTION

• This printer weighs approximately 20.4 kg (Main unit: Approx. 18.4 kg/Toner cartridge: Approx. 2 kg) without the paper cassette attached. The printer must be carried by two or more people, and care must be taken to avoid hurting your back or other portions of your body when carrying the printer.

• Be sure not to hold the top cover, multi-purpose tray, or any portions other than the grips for moving the printer. If you do so, you may drop the printer, resulting in personal injuries.

5

Moving the Printer 5-37

5

• The back portion of the printer is relatively heavy. Be careful not to get off-balanced when lifting the printer. If you do so, you may drop the printer, resulting in personal injuries.

Back portion is relatively heavy

• Do not carry the printer with the paper cassette attached. If you do so, the paper cassette may drop resulting in personal injuries.

• Do not carry the printer with the paper feeders installed. If you do so, the paper feeders may drop resulting in personal injuries.

IMPORTANT

• Make sure that the top cover and multi-purpose tray are closed before carrying the printer.

5-38 Moving the Printer

• Do not touch the connector on the back of the printer, as this may result in printer error.

Connector

• When carrying the printer, do not touch the top rear cover on the back of the printer. If the top rear cover is not set properly, an error message such as "Duplex Unit is not attached correctly" or "Toner Cover Open" appears in the Printer Status Window.

Top rear cover

5

Moving the Printer 5-39

5

• How To Set the Top Rear Cover

If the top rear cover comes off or is not set properly, take the cover out once using the following procedure, and then set it again, properly.

1. While pressing the top rear cover from both sides a and pressing the tabs on the top rear cover b, remove the top rear cover c.

b a c b a

2. Set the top rear cover.

Fit up the upper left portion of the top rear cover a, then insert the projection on the upper right into the hole b.

a b

While pressing the tabs on the back of the top rear cover c, insert the tabs into the holes d to set the top rear cover.

c d c d

The top rear cover is set, snapping. Make sure that the tabs are inserted completely into the holes.

IMPORTANT

Be sure that the film of the top rear cover does not get creased when installing the top rear cover.

Film

5-40 Moving the Printer

NOTE

For details on the installation site, see "Getting Started Guide".

1

Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer OFF a , then unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet b .

b

OFF

ON a

2

Remove all interface cables and the power cord.

NOTE

If the optional duplex unit is installed, remove it from the printer. For details on

removing the duplex unit, see "Removing the Duplex Unit," on p. 6-34.

3

Pull out the paper cassette.

If it is difficult to pull out the paper cassette, lift it slightly, and then pull it out horizontally.

5

Moving the Printer 5-41

4

Move the printer from the installation site.

Carry the printer with 2 or more people by holding the grips on the lower portion of the printer and lifting it up at the same time.

5 NOTE

If the optional paper feeders were previously installed in the printer, place the paper feeders on the new installation site before carrying the printer to the site. For details

on the procedure for installing the paper feeders, see "Installing the Paper

Feeders," on p. 6-20.

5

Set the printer down carefully at the new installation site.

CAUTION

Set the printer down slowly and carefully. Be careful not to hurt your hands.

IMPORTANT

Be sure that a space for installing optional accessories and connecting cables is secured at the installation site.

5-42 Moving the Printer

6

Set the paper cassette in the printer.

Set the paper cassette referring to the figure below:

• If the paper cassette is not extended, push the paper cassette into the printer firmly until the front side of the cassette is flush with the front surface of the printer.

• If the paper cassette is extended, the front side of the cassette is not flush with the front surface of the printer. Push the paper cassette gently until it stops.

5

NOTE

If the optional duplex unit was previously installed, reinstall it on the printer. For

details on the procedure for installing the duplex unit, see "Installing the Duplex

Unit," on p. 6-32.

Moving the Printer 5-43

5

7

Connect all interface cables and the power cord to the printer.

8

Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.

Transporting the Printer

When transporting the printer for reasons such as relocating, remove the toner cartridge and store the printer and the parts in the package that they came in with the protective materials attached in order to prevent them from being damaged while being transported.

If the original package and packing materials are not available, find an appropriate box and packing materials and pack the printer and the parts appropriately.

5-44 Moving the Printer

Handling the Printer

This printer consists of various electronic and precise optical parts. Read the following section so that you can handle the printer properly.

IMPORTANT

The procedures for handling the printer are also described in "Important Safety

Instructions" (See p. xii).

Precautions for Handling the Printer

Observe the following precautions so that high-quality printing can be maintained constantly.

IMPORTANT

• Do not place any heavy objects on the printer, trays, or covers. It may result in damage to the printer.

5

• Do not leave any cover open longer than required. Exposing the printer to direct sunlight or strong light may result in deterioration in print quality.

Handling the Printer 5-45

• Avoid vibration while the printer is printing. It may result in deterioration in print quality.

5

• Do not open the top cover during printing. It may result in damage to the printer.

• Handle the top cover, multi-purpose tray, and other covers gently when opening or closing them. Otherwise, it may result in damage to the printer.

• If you want to spread a blanket on the printer to prevent dust from entering the printer, turn the power OFF and allow the printer to cool down sufficiently before covering the printer.

• If you do not plan to use the printer for a long period of time, unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.

• Do not use or store the printer in a room where chemicals are used.

Precaution for Storing the Printer

If you do not plan to use the printer for a long period of time, store it in the following environment:

• Storage temperature range: 0 to 35 °C (32 to 95 °F)

• Storage humidity range: 10 to 80% RH with no condensation

5-46 Handling the Printer

Optional Accessories

6

CHAPTER

This chapter describes the optional accessories and the procedures for installing them on the printer.

Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Paper Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2

Paper Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3

Duplex Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4

Network Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5

Paper Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Installation Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8

Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9

Removing the Packing Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9

Moving the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15

Installing the Paper Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-20

Removing the Paper Feeders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25

Duplex Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

Installation Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29

Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30

Removing the Packing Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30

Installing the Duplex Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32

Removing the Duplex Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34

Network Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38

Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40

Installing the Network Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-41

Setting the Network Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45

Resetting the Network Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-48

Removing the Network Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-51

6-1

6

Optional Accessories

The following optional accessories are available in order to use this printer to its full extent. Purchase them to fulfill your needs. For the optional accessories, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

Paper Cassette

The optional paper cassettes are used by being replaced with the paper cassettes supplied with the printer or optional paper feeders.

The optional 250-sheet universal cassette UC-66A is used by being replaced with the standard cassette of the printer.

The optional 250-sheet universal cassette UC-66B is used by being replaced with the paper cassette of an optional paper feeder.

Up to approximately 250 sheets of paper (64 g/m 2 ) at sizes of A3, B4, A4, B5, A5,

Ledger, Legal, Letter, and Executive can be loaded in a paper cassette.

250-sheet Universal Cassette UC-66A 250-sheet Universal Cassette UC-66B

NOTE

A release date for the universal cassette designed for custom paper sizes has not yet been set.

6-2 Optional Accessories

Paper Feeder

This printer is supplied with 2 paper sources: the paper cassette and multi-purpose tray. By installing the optional paper feeders, up to 5 paper sources can be used.

The 250-sheet paper feeder unit PF-66 has a mid-transport area and consists of a

250-sheet paper feeder and 250-sheet paper cassette.

The 250-sheet paper feeder unit PF-66E consists of a 250-sheet paper feeder and

250-sheet paper cassette.

Up to approximately 250 sheets of paper (64 g/m 2 ) at sizes of A3, B4, A4, B5, A5,

Ledger, Legal, Letter, and Executive can be loaded in the 250-sheet paper cassette.

250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66E

NOTE

• Up to 3 paper feeders can be installed as shown in the figure:

* Be sure to install the 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit

PF-66 at the top among the optional paper feeder units. More than one 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit

PF-66 cannot be installed. Also, it cannot be installed under the 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-

66E.

* The 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66E cannot be installed on the 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66.

250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66

250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66E

• The paper feeder is designed for LBP3800/3700/3600. Paper feeders designed for other printers cannot be used.

For details on the procedure for installing the paper feeder, see "Paper Feeder," on p.

6-6.

Optional Accessories 6-3

6

Duplex Unit

The duplex unit DU-66 is a unit that enables automatic 2-sided printing. The duplex unit is to be installed on the back of the main unit. You can perform automatic

2-sided printing on standard paper sizes (A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Ledger, Legal, Letter and Executive).

6

Duplex Unit DU-66

IMPORTANT

You cannot perform automatic 2-sided printing on heavy paper (91 - 128 g/m 2 ), transparencies, labels, envelopes, and custom paper sizes.

NOTE

• The duplex unit is designed for LBP3800/3700/3600. Duplex units designed for other printers cannot be used.

For details on the procedure for installing the duplex unit, see "Duplex Unit," on p. 6-28.

6-4 Optional Accessories

Network Board

The network board fits inside the printer and is compatible with the TCP/IP protocol for connecting the printer to LAN. The network board enables the operation of the printer using a Web Browser "Remote UI" allowing you to specify settings and manage the printer from a computer on the network.

NB-C1

ERR LNK 100

Network board (Canon NB-C1)

NOTE

For details on "Remote UI", see "Remote UI Guide".

For details on the procedure for installing the network board, see "Network Board," on p.

6-38.

6

Optional Accessories 6-5

6

Paper Feeder

The paper feeders are to be installed at the bottom of the main unit.

Make sure that all the following items are contained in the package before installing the paper feeder. If any item is missing or damaged, please contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

Paper size indicator

250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66 Cassette protective cover Paper size labels

250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66E Paper size labels Paper size indicator

WARNING

Be sure that the power of the printer is turned OFF, the power cord is unplugged, and all interface cables and power cord are disconnected from the printer before installing the paper feeders. Otherwise, the power cord or interface cables may be damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.

6-6 Paper Feeder

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the connector or paper feed roller in the paper feeder. It may result in damage to the printer or misfeeds.

Paper feed roller

Connector

Connector

Paper feed roller

NOTE

• Up to 3 paper feeders can be installed as shown in the figure:

* Be sure to install the 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit

PF-66 at the top among the optional paper feeder units. More than one 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit

PF-66 cannot be installed. Also, it cannot be installed under the 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-

66E.

* The 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66E cannot be installed on the 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66.

250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66

250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66E

For more details on the procedure for installing the paper feeder, see "Loading Paper in

Cassette 2, 3, or 4," on p. 2-27.

Paper Feeder 6-7

6

Installation Space

Dimensions of each part, foot positions, and the space required for using the printer with the paper feeder installed are indicated in the following figure:

Front Surface

• Dimensions of the Printer

Cassette protective cover

6

456 166

• Required Peripheral Space

(mm)

Paper cassette

650

1372

• Foot Positions

· 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66

100.5

258 98.3

Cassette protective cover

100

Top cover

(mm)

· 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66E

100.5

258 98.3

6-8 Paper Feeder

100.5 258 98.3

100.5

258 98.3

(mm)

The rubber feet are 5.4 mm high and 22 mm x 22 mm wide square.

(mm)

Parts and Their Functions

250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66 a

250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66E b

Opened when removing jammed paper. (See p.

7-21)

Up to 250 sheets of paper (64 g/m 2 ) at sizes of A3,

B4, A4, B5, A5, Ledger, Legal, Letter, and Executive

can be loaded. (See p. 2-17)

Removing the Packing Materials

The paper feeders are provided with tapes and packing material to be protected from excessive vibrations and shocks during delivery. Remove the tapes and packing material before installing the paper feeders on the printer.

IMPORTANT

• If there is any packing material remaining inside the paper feeder, this may result in misfeeds or damage to the printer when operating the printer. Be sure to follow the procedure to remove all the packing materials.

• The removed packing materials are required when transporting the printer for reasons such as relocating or servicing. Keep them where they will not get lost.

6

Paper Feeder 6-9

Removing the Packing Materials from the 250-sheet Paper Feeder

Unit PF-66

1

Remove the tapes securing the paper feeder (3 locations) and remove the packing material.

Remove the packing material by removing the tape that is securing it a and pulling it out vertically b.

b a

6

2

Pull out the paper cassette gently until it stops a , then lift up the front portion of the cassette to remove it b .

a

6-10 Paper Feeder b

IMPORTANT

The paper cassette cannot be pulled out horizontally. If you try to pull it out forcefully, this may result in damage to the paper cassette.

3

Remove the packing material by removing the tape a and pulling out the tab vertically b as shown in the figure.

a b

4

Remove the tapes and packing material in the paper cassette.

Remove the 2 tapes a.

6 a a

Paper Feeder 6-11

6

While pressing down the plate in the paper cassette as shown in the figure b, remove the packing material c.

c b b

IMPORTANT

• The paper cassette is provided with the packing materials. Be sure to pull out the paper cassette to remove all the packing materials.

• Do not touch the black rubber pad in the paper cassette. If you touch it, this may result in misfeeds.

Rubber pad

6-12 Paper Feeder

Removing the Packing Materials from the 250-sheet Paper Feeder

Unit PF-66E

1

Remove the tapes securing the paper feeder (1 location).

2

Pull out the paper cassette gently until it stops a , then lift up the front portion of the cassette to remove it b .

6 a b

IMPORTANT

The paper cassette cannot be pulled out horizontally. If you try to pull it out forcefully, this may result in damage to the paper cassette.

Paper Feeder 6-13

6

3

Remove the packing material by removing the tape a and pulling out the tab vertically b as shown in the figure.

a b

4

Remove the tapes and packing material in the paper cassette.

Remove the 2 tapes a.

a a

6-14 Paper Feeder

While pressing down the plate in the paper cassette as shown in the figure b, remove the packing material c.

c b b

IMPORTANT

• The paper cassette is provided with the packing materials. Be sure to pull out the paper cassette to remove all the packing materials.

• Do not touch the black rubber pad in the paper cassette. If you touch it, this may result in misfeeds.

Rubber pad

6

Moving the Printer

When installing the paper feeders in the printer after installing the printer, move the printer to an appropriate location temporarily using the following procedure.

WARNING

Be sure that the power is turned OFF, the power cord is unplugged, and all interface cables are disconnected from the printer before moving the printer.

Otherwise, the power cord or interface cables may be damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.

CAUTION

Do not carry the printer with the paper cassette attached. If you do so, the paper cassette may drop resulting in personal injuries.

Paper Feeder 6-15

6

1

Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer OFF a , then unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet b .

b

OFF

ON a

2

Remove all interface cables and the power cord.

NOTE

If the optional duplex unit is installed, remove it from the printer. For details on

removing the duplex unit, see "Removing the Duplex Unit," on p. 6-34.

3

Pull out the paper cassette.

If it is difficult to pull out the paper cassette, lift it slightly, and then pull it out horizontally.

6-16 Paper Feeder

4

Move the printer from the installation site.

Carry the printer with 2 or more people by holding the grips on the lower portion of the printer and lifting it up at the same time.

CAUTION

• This printer weighs approximately 20.4 kg (Main Unit: Approx. 18.4 kg/

Toner Cartridge: Approx. 2 kg) without the paper cassette attached. The printer must be carried by 2 or more people, and care must be taken to avoid hurting your back or other portions of your body when carrying the printer.

• Be sure not to hold the top cover, multi-purpose tray, or any portions other than the grips for moving the printer. If you do so, you may drop the printer, resulting in personal injuries.

6

Paper Feeder 6-17

6

• The back portion of the printer is relatively heavy. Be careful not to get off-balanced when lifting the printer. If you do so, you may drop the printer, resulting in personal injuries.

Back portion is relatively heavy

IMPORTANT

• Make sure that the top cover and multi-purpose tray are closed before carrying the printer.

• Do not touch the connector on the back of the printer, as this may result in printer error.

Connector

• When carrying the printer, do not touch the top rear cover on the back of the printer. If the top rear cover is not set properly, an error message such as "Duplex

Unit is not attached correctly" or "Toner Cover Open" appears in the Printer Status

Window.

Top rear cover

6-18 Paper Feeder

• How To Set the Top Rear Cover

If the top rear cover comes off or is not set properly, take the cover out once using the following procedure, and then set it again, properly.

1. While pressing the top rear cover from both sides a and pressing the tabs on the top rear cover b, remove the top rear cover c.

a c b a b

2. Set the top rear cover.

Fit up the upper left portion of the top rear cover a, then insert the projection on the upper right into the hole b.

a b

While pressing the tabs on the back of the top rear cover c, insert the tabs into the holes d to set the top rear cover.

c d c d

6

The top rear cover is set, snapping. Make sure that the tabs are inserted completely into the holes.

IMPORTANT

Be sure that the film of the top rear cover does not get creased when installing the top rear cover.

Film

Paper Feeder 6-19

Installing the Paper Feeders

The paper feeders are to be installed at the bottom of the main unit.

CAUTION

• Set the printer or paper feeders down slowly and carefully. Be careful not to hurt your hands.

• Do not carry the printer with the paper cassette attached. If you do so, the paper cassette may drop resulting in personal injuries.

• Do not carry the printer with the paper feeders installed. If you do so, the paper feeders may drop resulting in personal injuries.

6

IMPORTANT

When the paper feeders are installed, be sure that the paper cassettes above the feeding paper feeder (Cassette 2, 3, or 4) are set before using it. If those paper cassettes are not set, paper cannot be fed from the lower paper source. (For example, if Cassette 2 is not set, paper cannot be fed from Cassette 3.)

6-20 Paper Feeder

1

Pull out paper cassettes from all the paper feeders.

Pull out the paper cassette gently until it stops a, then lift up the front portion of the cassette to remove it b.

a b

IMPORTANT

The paper cassette cannot be pulled out horizontally. If you try to pull it out forcefully, this may result in damage to the paper cassette.

2

Place the paper feeders at the installation site.

When carrying a paper feeder, hold the grips on both sides with both hands as shown in the figure.

6

Paper Feeder 6-21

IMPORTANT

• Do not touch the connector or paper feed roller in the paper feeder. It may result in damage to the printer or misfeeds.

Paper feed roller

Connector

6

Connector

Paper feed roller

• Do not install the paper feeders on a platform that may warp from the weight of the printer and optional accessories, or where the printer is liable to sink (such as on a carpet or mat).

• Secure enough space around the paper feeders so that you can install the printer and connect cords such as the power cord and interface cables.

6-22 Paper Feeder

3

When installing a paper feeder on another paper feeder, match the positioning pins and connector and gently set it down.

Positioning pin

Positioning pin

Connector

NOTE

Up to 3 paper feeders can be installed as shown in the figure:

* Be sure to install the 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit

PF-66 at the top among the optional paper feeder units. More than one 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit

PF-66 cannot be installed. Also, it cannot be installed under the 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-

66E.

* The 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66E cannot be installed on the 250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66.

6

250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66

250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66E

Paper Feeder 6-23

4

When installing the main unit on the paper feeders, match the positioning pins and connector and gently set it down.

6

Positioning pin

Positioning pin

Connector

5

Hook the cassette protective cover to the projections on the back of the paper feeder a , keeping it at angle, and then set it down gently b .

Attach the cassette protective cover securely until it snaps.

a a b

6-24 Paper Feeder

IMPORTANT

Do not put hands, press hard, or place objects on the cassette protective cover. It may damage to the cassette protective cover.

NOTE

The cassette protective cover can be attached to the back of any of the paper feeders. Attach it to the appropriate position.

6

Set the paper cassettes in the main unit and paper feeders.

NOTE

If the optional duplex unit was previously installed, reinstall it on the printer. For

details on the procedure for installing the duplex unit, see "Installing the Duplex

Unit," on p. 6-32.

7

Connect all interface cables and the power cord to the printer.

8

Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.

NOTE

After installing the paper feeders, you have to specify the settings for the optional accessories in the [Configuration]/[Device Settings] sheet in the printer driver. You can obtain the status of the optional accessories automatically by clicking the [Get

Device Status] button in the [Configuration]/[Device Settings] sheet.

Removing the Paper Feeders

Remove the paper feeders using the following procedure.

WARNING

Be sure that the power of the printer is turned OFF, the power cord is unplugged, and all interface cables and power cord are disconnected from the printer before removing the paper feeders. Otherwise, the power cord or interface cables may be damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.

CAUTION

• Do not carry the printer with the paper cassette attached. If you do so, the paper cassette may drop resulting in personal injuries.

6

Paper Feeder 6-25

• Do not carry the printer with the paper feeders installed. If you do so, the paper feeders may drop resulting in personal injuries.

6

IMPORTANT

When moving or servicing the printer, remove the paper feeders and paper cassettes.

1

Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer OFF, then unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.

2

Remove all interface cables and the power cord.

NOTE

If the optional duplex unit is installed, remove it from the printer. For details on

removing the duplex unit, see "Removing the Duplex Unit," on p. 6-34.

6-26 Paper Feeder

3

Pull out paper cassettes from the main unit and all the paper feeders.

4

Lift up the printer and remove it from the paper feeders.

5

If 2 or more paper feeders are installed, remove them from the top.

6

Move the paper feeders.

7

Move back the main unit to the installation site.

8

Set the paper cassette in the printer.

NOTE

If the optional duplex unit was previously installed, reinstall it on the printer. For

details on the procedure for installing the duplex unit, see "Installing the Duplex

Unit," on p. 6-32.

9

Connect all interface cables and the power cord to the printer.

10

Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.

6

Paper Feeder 6-27

Duplex Unit

The duplex unit is to be installed on the back of the main unit.

Confirm the contents of the package before installing the duplex unit. If any item is damaged, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

6

Duplex Unit DU-66

WARNING

Be sure that the power switch of the printer is turned OFF, the power cord is unplugged, and all interface cables and power cord are disconnected from the printer before installing the duplex unit. Otherwise, the power cord or interface cables may be damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.

6-28 Duplex Unit

Installation Space

Dimensions of each part and the space required for using the printer with the duplex unit installed is indicated in the figure below:

Front Surface

• Dimensions of the Printer

Duplex unit rear cover

Duplex unit top cover

524 137

• Required Peripheral Space

240

Paper cassette

650

1414

Duplex unit rear cover

Duplex unit rear cover

Top cover

Duplex unit top cover

(mm)

Duplex unit rear cover

(mm)

6

Duplex Unit 6-29

Parts and Their Functions

a b c

6

Opened when removing jammed paper. (See p.

7-24)

Opened when removing the duplex unit or jammed

paper. (See p. 7-24)

Used when installing or removing the duplex unit.

Removing the Packing Materials

The duplex unit is provided with tapes and packing material to be protected from excessive vibrations and shocks during delivery. Remove the tapes and packing material before installing the duplex unit on the printer.

IMPORTANT

• If there is any packing material remaining inside the duplex unit, this may result in misfeeds or damage to the printer when operating the printer. Be sure to follow the procedure to remove all the packing materials.

• The removed packing materials are required when transporting the printer for reasons such as relocating or servicing. Keep them where they will not get lost.

6-30 Duplex Unit

1

Remove the tapes that are securing the duplex unit.

2

Open the duplex unit top cover a , then remove the protective sheet inside the duplex unit b .

a

6 b

Duplex Unit 6-31

6

Installing the Duplex Unit

The duplex unit is to be installed on the back of the main unit.

1

Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer OFF a , then unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet b .

b

OFF

ON a

2

Remove all interface cables and the power cord.

3

Remove the top rear cover of the printer.

As shown in the figure, while pressing the top rear cover from both sides a and pressing the tabs on the top rear cover b, remove the top rear cover c.

b a c b a

6-32 Duplex Unit

IMPORTANT

Keep the top rear cover. It is required after the duplex unit is removed.

4

Remove the bottom rear cover of the printer.

IMPORTANT

Keep the bottom rear cover. It is required after the duplex unit is removed.

5

Install the duplex unit by matching the positioning pins on the holes on the back of the printer.

Push the duplex unit firmly until it clicks.

6

Positioning pin

CAUTION

Install the duplex unit gently and carefully to avoid catching your hand between the printer and duplex unit, as this may result in personal injuries.

Duplex Unit 6-33

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the duplex unit connector, as this may result in damage to the printer or printer error.

Connector

6

6

Connect all interface cables and the power cord to the printer.

7

Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.

NOTE

After installing the duplex unit, you have to specify the settings for the optional accessories in the [Configuration]/[Device Settings] sheet in the printer driver. You can obtain the status of the optional accessories automatically by clicking the [Get

Device Status] button in the [Configuration]/[Device Settings] sheet.

Removing the Duplex Unit

Remove the duplex unit using the following procedure. Have ready the top rear cover and bottom rear cover removed from the printer when the duplex unit was installed.

WARNING

Be sure that the power switch of the printer is turned OFF, the power cord is unplugged, and all interface cables and power cord are disconnected from the printer before removing the duplex unit. Otherwise, the power cord or interface cables may be damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.

IMPORTANT

When moving or servicing the printer, remove the duplex unit.

6-34 Duplex Unit

1

Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer OFF, then unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.

2

Remove all interface cables and the power cord.

3

Open the duplex unit rear cover.

4

Push up the lock release levers on each side of the duplex unit, then remove the duplex unit.

5

Close the duplex unit rear cover.

6

Set the top rear cover.

Fit up the upper left portion of the top rear cover a, then insert the projection on the upper right into the hole b.

6 a b

Duplex Unit 6-35

6

While pressing the tabs on the back of the top rear cover c, insert the tabs into the holes d to set the top rear cover.

c d c d

The top rear cover is set, snapping. Make sure that the tabs are inserted completely into the holes.

6-36 Duplex Unit

IMPORTANT

• Be sure that the film of the top rear cover does not get creased when installing the top rear cover.

Film

• Set the top rear cover properly. If the top rear cover is not set properly, an error message such as "Duplex Unit is not attached correctly" or "Toner Cover Open" appears in the Printer Status Window.

7

Set the bottom rear cover of the printer.

8

Connect all interface cables and the power cord to the printer.

9

Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.

6

Duplex Unit 6-37

Network Board

The network board is to be installed into the expansion slot on the back of the printer.

6

NB-C1

ERR LNK 100

Network board (NB-C1) Screws (2 pieces)

By installing the optional network board, you can use LBP3600 directly connected to a network.

6-38 Network Board

■ Connecting the network board on the printer directly to the computer

Client

(Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003)

LBP3600

(Network board installed)

Client

(Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003)

: TCP/IP

■ Connecting the printer to the computer via a print server

Client

(Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003)

Print server

(Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003)

Client

(Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003)

LBP3600

(Network board installed)

6

* If your print server is Windows 98/Me, you cannot download and install on Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003.

: TCP/IP

: Usable Protocols

CAUTION

• Be sure that the power of the printer is turned OFF and all interface cables and power cord are disconnected from the printer before installing the network board. Replacing with the power ON or the cables and power cord connected may result in an electrical shock.

• Be careful when handling the network board. Touching the edges or a sharp portion of the network board may result in personal injuries.

IMPORTANT

Parts that are sensitive to static electricity are used on the network board. Observe the following precautions when handling the network board to prevent damage from static electricity.

- Touch a metal object to dissipate static electricity before handling the network board.

- When handling the network board, do not touch anything that generates static electricity such as the computer display.

- Do not touch the network board parts, printed wire, or connectors with your hands.

- To prevent the network board being affected by static electricity, keep it in the protective bag until it is ready to be installed. The protective bag is required after the network board is removed. So, keep the bag.

Network Board 6-39

6

NOTE

This network board does not come with a LAN cable. A Category 5 twisted pair cable is required for installing the network board and connecting the printer to a network. Have a cable or hub available as needed.

Parts and Their Functions

a

ERR LNK 100 f

NB-C1

NB-C1

ERR LNK 100 e d c b

Connects to the printer. Do not touch the connector directly with your hands.

Connects to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX LAN cable.

Illuminates when the network board is connected to the network with 100BASE-TX.

Does not illuminate when connected with

10BASE-T.

Illuminates when the network board is connected to the network properly.

Illuminates or blinks when the network board is not working properly.

It is required when specifying the IP address using the ARP/PING command. It may be also required when installing the printer driver.

6-40 Network Board

Installing the Network Board

Install the network board on the expansion slot of the printer using the following procedure. A Phillips screwdriver is required for installing the network board. Have one that matches the size of the screws available.

1

Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer OFF a , then unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet b .

b

OFF

ON a

2

Remove all interface cables and the power cord.

If there is not enough space to install the network board, move the printer so that you can work easier.

NOTE

If the optional duplex unit is installed, remove it from the printer. For details on

removing the duplex unit, see "Removing the Duplex Unit," on p. 6-34.

6

Network Board 6-41

3

Remove the screw and protective plate for the expansion slot.

6

IMPORTANT

The removed protective plate and screw are required when the network board is removed. Keep them where they will not get lost.

4

Insert the network board into the expansion slot.

Hold the metal panel portions of the network board and insert the board while aligning it with the guide rail inside the expansion slot.

IMPORTANT

• Do not touch the network board parts, printed wire, or connectors with your hands.

• Insert the printer connector of the network board securely into the connector inside the expansion slot.

6-42 Network Board

5

Secure the top and bottom portions of the network board with the 2 screws supplied with the network board.

6

Connect the LAN cable.

Connect a LAN cable that is compatible with the LAN connector of the network board according to the network.

6

NOTE

• This network board does not come with a LAN cable. A Category 5 twisted pair cable is required for installing the network board and connecting the printer to a network. Have a cable or hub available as needed.

• If the optional duplex unit was previously installed, reinstall it on the printer. For

details on the procedure for installing the duplex unit, see "Installing the Duplex

Unit," on p. 6-32.

Network Board 6-43

6

7

Connect all interface cables and the power cord to the printer.

8

Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.

9

Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer ON.

OFF

ON

IMPORTANT

If the printer does not operate properly, or an error message appears in the Printer

Status Window, see "Troubleshooting," on p. 7-1.

6-44 Network Board

10

Make sure that the LNK indicator (green) on the network board is on.

If the network board is connected with 10BASE-T, the board is working properly when the LNK indicator is on.

If the network board is connected with 100BASE-TX, the board is working properly when the LNK indicator and 100 indicator are on.

ERR indicator

LNK indicator

100 indicator

If the network board is not working properly, turn the power of the printer OFF, and then check the LAN cable connection, hub performance, and network board installation.

Setting the Network Board

The default value of the network board is set at "Auto detect". Usually, you do not need to change the setting, since the transmission speed and transfer mode of

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX are detected automatically. If the printer cannot communicate with other machines on the network, set the DIP switches on the network board. Before setting the DIP switches, turn the power of the printer OFF and remove the network board. A Phillips screwdriver is required for removing the network board. Have one that matches the size of the screws available. Set the DIP switches according to the transmission speed of the connected network as follows.

6

Network Board 6-45

6

IMPORTANT

When setting the DIP switches, be careful not to damage the main board with the tip of a ball-point pen etc. Do not use a sharp object such as a mechanical pencil.

DIP switches

1 2 3 4 ON

OFF

OFF

* Shown above is the Auto detect setting (default setting)

NB-C1

ERR LNK 100

Setting the Network Transmission Speed/Transfer Mode and the DIP

Switches

Communication speed and

Transmission mode of LAN

DIP switch setting

1 2 3 4

Auto detect (default setting)

ON

OFF

OFF

1 2 3 4

10BASE-T/Half-duplex

ON

OFF

OFF

1 2 3 4

10BASE-T/Full-duplex

ON

OFF

OFF

1 2 3 4

100BASE-TX/Half-duplex

ON

OFF

OFF

1 2 3 4

100BASE-TX/Full-duplex

ON

OFF

OFF

6-46 Network Board

1

Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer OFF, then unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.

2

Remove all interface cables and the power cord.

NOTE

If the optional duplex unit is installed, remove it from the printer. For details on

removing the duplex unit, see "Removing the Duplex Unit," on p. 6-34.

3

Remove the 2 screws and remove the network board.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the network board parts, printed wire, or connectors with your hands.

4

Set the DIP switches.

Set the DIP switches with the tip of a ball-point pen etc. For details on the setting

procedure, see the table on p. 6-46.

6

DIP switches

1 2 3 4

ON

OFF

OFF

NB-C1

ERR LNK 100

5

Insert the network board into the expansion slot.

Hold the metal panel portions of the network board and insert the board while aligning it with the guide rail inside the expansion slot.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the network board parts, printed wire, or connectors with your hands.

Insert the printer connector of the network board securely into the connector inside the expansion slot.

Network Board 6-47

6

6

Secure the top and bottom portions of the network board with the 2 screws supplied with the network board.

7

Connect the LAN cable.

NOTE

If the optional duplex unit was previously installed, reinstall it on the printer. For

details on the procedure for installing the duplex unit, see "Installing the Duplex

Unit," on p. 6-32.

8

Connect all interface cables and the power cord to the printer.

9

Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.

Resetting the Network Board

If you want to reset the network board to the default values, use Remote UI or FTP client. For details on Remote UI, see "Chapter 3 Various Functions of Remote UI" in

Remote UI Guide, and on FTP client, see "Chapter 5 Appendix" in Network Guide.

Even if none of the above procedures work, you can reset the settings for the network board by manipulating the DIP switches using the following procedure. A

Phillips screwdriver is required to reset the settings for the network board. Have one that matches the size of the screws available.

1

Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer OFF, then unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.

2

Remove all interface cables and the power cord.

NOTE

If the optional duplex unit is installed, remove it from the printer. For details on

removing the duplex unit, see "Removing the Duplex Unit," on p. 6-34.

3

Remove the 2 screws and remove the network board.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the network board parts, printed wire, or connectors with your hands.

6-48 Network Board

4

Switch the DIP switch 1 to ON.

Set the DIP switches with the tip of a ball-point pen etc.

DIP switches 1

1 2 3 4

ON

OFF

NB-C1

ERR LNK 100

IMPORTANT

When setting the DIP switches, be careful not to damage the main board with the tip of a ball-point pen etc. Do not use a sharp object such as a mechanical pencil.

5

Insert the network board into the expansion slot.

Hold the metal panel portions of the network board and insert the board while aligning it with the guide rail inside the expansion slot.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the network board parts, printed wire, or connectors with your hands.

Insert the printer connector of the network board securely into the connector inside the expansion slot.

6

Network Board 6-49

6

6

Secure the top and bottom portions of the network board with the 2 screws supplied with the network board.

7

Connect the power cord.

8

Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.

9

Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer ON, wait until the Ready indicator illuminates, and then press " " of the power switch to turn the printer OFF.

10

Unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.

11

Remove the power cord.

12

Remove the network board, then reset the DIP switch 1 to

OFF.

Set the DIP switches with the tip of a ball-point pen etc.

DIP switches 1

1 2 3 4

OFF

OFF

NB-C1

ERR LNK 100

IMPORTANT

When setting the DIP switches, be careful not to damage the main board with the tip of a ball-point pen etc. Do not use a sharp object such as a mechanical pencil.

6-50 Network Board

13

Install the network board.

NOTE

If the optional duplex unit was previously installed, reinstall it on the printer. For

details on the procedure for installing the duplex unit, see "Installing the Duplex

Unit," on p. 6-32.

14

Connect all interface cables and the power cord to the printer.

15

Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.

Removing the Network Board

Remove the network board using the following procedure. Have ready the protective plate and screw for the expansion slot removed when the network board was installed.

CAUTION

• Be sure that the power of the printer is turned OFF and all interface cables and power cord are disconnected from the printer before removing the network board. Replacing with the power ON or the cables and power cord connected may result in an electrical shock.

• Be careful when handling the network board. Touching the edges or a sharp portion of the network board may result in personal injuries.

6

1

Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer OFF, then unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.

2

Remove all interface cables and the power cord.

NOTE

If the optional duplex unit is installed, remove it from the printer. For details on

removing the duplex unit, see "Removing the Duplex Unit," on p. 6-34.

3

Remove the 2 screws and remove the network board.

Store the network board in the protective bag that it came in.

Network Board 6-51

6

IMPORTANT

• Do not touch the network board parts, printed wire, or connectors with your hands.

• The removed 2 screws are required when the network board is installed. Keep them where they will not get lost.

4

Attach the protective plate to the expansion slot and secure it with the screw.

NOTE

If the optional duplex unit was previously installed, reinstall it on the printer. For

details on the procedure for installing the duplex unit, see "Installing the Duplex

Unit," on p. 6-32.

5

Connect all interface cables and the power cord to the printer.

6

Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.

6-52 Network Board

Troubleshooting

7

CHAPTER

This chapter describes the remedies for problems such as a paper jam or poor print quality.

Troubleshooting Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Alarm Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Procedure for Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6

Service Call Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Print Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Paper Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

When Nothing is Printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Installation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

When Uninstallation Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-51

Uninstalling the USB Class Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-53

Problems During Local Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-56

Installation Problems When the Printer is Shared on a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-57

Miscellaneous Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58

Confirming the Printer Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60

7-1

7

Troubleshooting Map

If any problem occurs while you are using the printer, follow the flow chart shown below to check the problem.

Yes

The printer driver is not installed properly.

(See "Installation Problems," on p. 7-50)

The printer driver fails to print.

No

Printing is impossible.

The Alarm indicator is on or blinking.

(See "Alarm Indicator," on p. 7-3)

An error message appears on the

Printer Status Window.

Print quality deteriorates.

Follow the messages displayed on the Printer Status Window to remedy an error.

(See "Printer Status Window," on p.

4-79)

The power cord is not connected.

The power switch is turned OFF.

(See "Turning the Printer ON/OFF," on p. 1-10)

The printer is not connected to your computer.

(See "Connecting to a Computer," on p.1-13)

Toner density is set to light.

(See "Specifying the Print Quality," on p. 4-65)

The printer driver is not installed properly.

(See "Installation Problems," on p. 7-50)

Toner runs low.

(See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge," on p. 5-2)

The printer is installed in an adverse environment.

(See the Getting Started Guide)

Paper Problems

(See "Paper Problems," on p. 7-47)

Other Problems

(See "Paper Quality Problems," on p.

7-41)

7-2 Troubleshooting Map

Alarm Indicator

When a problem has occurred in the printer, the Alarm indicator (red) illuminates or blinks.

Paper

Alarm

Ready

When the Alarm indicator is on, a service error is occurring. In this case, see

"Service Call Display," on p. 7-39.

When the Alarm indicator is blinking, take measurements according to the direction of the Printer Status Window.

7

Alarm Indicator 7-3

Paper Jams

The messages shown below appears in the Printer Status Window when a paper jam occurs during printing.

7

WARNING

There are some areas inside the printer which are subject to high-voltages.

When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the printer, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the printer, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.

7-4 Paper Jams

CAUTION

• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the printer may become hot during use. Do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as doing so may result in burns or electrical shock.

• When removing jammed paper, take care not to allow the toner to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.

• When removing a used toner cartridge from the toner cartridge slot, remove the cartridge carefully to prevent the toner from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. If the toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.

• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the paper.

IMPORTANT

• Do not touch the high-voltage contacts inside the toner cover, as this may result in damage to the printer.

7

High-voltage contacts

• Before removing jammed paper, be sure to remove the toner cartridge and paper cassette, and open the top cover of the printer completely until it stops.

Paper Jams 7-5

7

• Remove jammed paper while the power of the printer is turned ON. If the power is turned

OFF, the data being printed will be deleted. In case you remove jammed paper when the duplex unit is installed in the printer, the data being printed will be deleted because you have to turn the power of the printer OFF.

• Applying excess force may result in tearing paper or damaging the parts in the printer.

When removing jammed paper, pull out the paper in the most appropriate direction, judging from the position of the paper.

• If paper is torn, be sure to find and remove any remaining pieces of paper.

• The error message may remain if jammed paper is removed without opening the top cover. In this case, open and close the top cover.

Procedure for Clearing Paper Jams

Follow the instructions below to remove the jammed paper:

1

Open the top cover.

IMPORTANT

Raise the top cover slowly and firmly, and open it completely until it stops. If any jammed paper is removed when the top cover is not opened completely, it may result in damage to the printer.

7-6 Paper Jams

2

Pull out the paper cassette.

If it is difficult to pull out the paper cassette, lift it slightly, and then pull it out horizontally.

3

Open the multi-purpose tray.

Holding the grip at the center of the printer, open the multi-purpose tray.

7

Paper Jams 7-7

4

If you are using the multi-purpose tray, raise the paper retaining lever, and then remove any loaded paper.

7

5

Remove any paper jammed in the multi-purpose tray.

IMPORTANT

If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step. Do not try to remove it forcefully.

7-8 Paper Jams

6

Lower the paper retaining lever.

7

Open the toner cover.

Press the green toner cover release button as shown in the figure a.

a

7

Paper Jams 7-9

7

Holding the green tab, open the toner cover until it clicks b.

Tab b

8

Pull out the toner cartridge partially by holding the grip, and then remove the cartridge with both hands as shown in the figure.

7-10 Paper Jams

9

Place the toner cartridge into the protective bag.

10

Turn the dial in the toner cover in the direction of the arrow to send any jammed paper.

7

11

Remove any paper jammed in the toner cover.

Remove the jammed paper gently to prevent unfixed toner from spilling.

Paper Jams 7-11

7

IMPORTANT

If you pull the jammed paper obliquely downward, unfixed toner may spill. When removing the jammed paper, pull it as obliquely upward as possible. Dirt inside the printer may cause deterioration in print quality.

12

Remove any paper jammed in the output tray.

Remove the jammed paper gently to prevent unfixed toner from spilling.

IMPORTANT

When rear edge of the paper remains in the fixing unit, unfixed toner is on the paper. Be careful not to spill the toner when removing the paper. Toner that spilled inside the printer may stain the inside, causing deterioration in print quality.

7-12 Paper Jams

13

If the jammed paper is under the delivery guide inner cover, open the cover.

Holding the green tab, raise the delivery guide inner cover.

14

Remove any jammed paper, then close the delivery guide inner cover.

Remove the jammed paper gently.

7

IMPORTANT

When top edge of the paper has been sent into the fixing unit, unfixed toner is on the paper. Be careful not to spill the toner when removing the paper. Toner that spilled inside the printer may stain the inside, causing deterioration in print quality.

Paper Jams 7-13

15

Close the toner cover.

Holding the center of the toner cover, close the cover until it clicks.

7

16

Close the multi-purpose tray.

7-14 Paper Jams

IMPORTANT

If you cannot close the multi-purpose tray, check if the toner cover is completely closed. If you try to close the multi-purpose tray forcefully, this may result in damage to the printer.

17

Remove any paper jammed at the bottom of the printer.

If a paper jam occurs when feeding paper from an optional paper feeder, see

"Paper Jam in the Paper Feeders," on p. 7-21.

18

Set the paper cassette in the printer.

7

If a paper jam occurs when performing 2-sided printing with the optional duplex

unit, see "Paper Jam in the Duplex Unit," on p. 7-24.

Paper Jams 7-15

19

Remove any jammed paper from the output tray.

7

IMPORTANT

Before removing the jammed paper, make sure that the top cover is opened completely until it stops. If any jammed paper is removed when the top cover is not opened completely, it may result in damage to the printer.

20

If the jammed paper is under the inner guide, raise the inner guide a , then remove the jammed paper b .

Raise the inner guide by holding the tab. Pull out the jammed paper gently.

a

Inner guide b

Tab

7-16 Paper Jams

21

Open the multi-purpose tray.

Holding the grip at the center of the printer, open the multi-purpose tray.

22

Open the toner cover.

Press the green toner cover release button as shown in the figure a.

a

7

Paper Jams 7-17

Holding the green tab, open the toner cover until it clicks b.

Tab b

7

23

Take the toner cartridge out of the protective bag, then install it in the printer.

Align the projections on each side of the toner cartridge with the toner cartridge guides inside the printer. Push the toner cartridge completely into the printer.

7-18 Paper Jams

24

Close the toner cover.

Holding the center of the toner cover, close the cover until it clicks.

IMPORTANT

• If you cannot close the toner cover, check if the toner cartridge is set properly. If you close the toner cover forcefully, this may cause damage to the printer.

• Do not leave the toner cover open for a long time after installing the toner cartridge.

25

Close the multi-purpose tray.

7

IMPORTANT

If you cannot close the multi-purpose tray, check if the toner cover is completely closed. If you try to close the multi-purpose tray forcefully, this may result in damage to the printer.

Paper Jams 7-19

26

Close the top cover.

7

If the message that indicates that paper is jammed somewhere in the paper sources or duplex unit does not disappear from the Printer Status Window even after closing the top cover, pieces of torn paper may still be remaining somewhere

in the paper feeders or duplex unit. In this case, see "When the Message that

Indicates the Paper Jam Does Not Disappear," on p. 7-29 to remove the jammed

paper.

7-20 Paper Jams

Paper Jam in the Paper Feeders

Check the paper feeders and remove the jammed paper in the following procedure:

1

Perform Step 1 to 17 of "Procedure for Clearing Paper Jams"

(See p. 7-6).

2

Open the rear transport guide.

Holding the green tab, open the transport guide.

Tab

7

3

Remove any jammed paper.

Paper Jams 7-21

7

4

Open the front transport guide.

Holding the green tab, open the transport guide.

Tab

5

Remove any jammed paper.

7-22 Paper Jams

6

Close the front transport guide.

7

Close the rear transport guide.

8

Remove the paper cassettes one at a time starting at the top, and remove any jammed paper.

7

Paper Jams 7-23

9

Set the paper cassettes in the main unit and paper feeders.

7

Proceed to Step 19 of "Procedure for Clearing Paper Jams" (See p. 7-16) to

remove the jammed paper. If a paper jam occurs when performing 2-sided

printing with the optional duplex unit, proceed to "Paper Jam in the Duplex Unit"

(See p. 7-24).

Paper Jam in the Duplex Unit

Check the duplex unit and remove the jammed paper in the following procedure:

1

Perform Step 1 to 18 of "Procedure for Clearing Paper Jams"

(See p. 7-6).

2

Open the duplex unit rear cover.

Holding the grip at the center of the printer, open the duplex unit rear cover.

7-24 Paper Jams

3

Close the top cover.

4

Open the duplex unit top cover.

7

Paper Jams 7-25

5

Remove any paper jammed in the duplex unit top cover.

7

6

Close the duplex unit top cover.

7-26 Paper Jams

7

If you see the jammed paper inside the duplex unit rear cover, simply pull out the paper to remove it.

8

If you cannot see the jammed paper inside the duplex unit rear cover, rotate the knob a to send and remove the paper b .

7 a b

Paper Jams 7-27

9

Open the top cover.

7

IMPORTANT

Raise the top cover slowly and firmly, and open it completely until it stops. If any jammed paper is removed when the top cover is not opened completely, it may result in damage to the printer.

10

Close the duplex unit rear cover.

7-28 Paper Jams

Proceed to Step 19 of "Procedure for Clearing Paper Jams" (See p. 7-16) to

remove the jammed paper.

When the Message that Indicates the Paper Jam Does Not Disappear

When the optional accessories are installed, and if the message that indicates that paper is jammed somewhere in the paper sources or duplex unit does not disappear from the Printer Status Window even after removing the jammed paper, pieces of torn paper may still be remaining somewhere in the paper sources of the paper feeders or duplex unit bottom cover area. Check the paper sources of the paper feeders and duplex unit bottom cover area and remove the jammed paper in the following procedure.

IMPORTANT

In case you remove jammed paper when the duplex unit is installed in the printer, the data being printed will be deleted because you have to turn the power of the printer OFF.

After removing the jammed paper, print again.

When the duplex unit is not installed

1

Open the top cover.

IMPORTANT

Raise the top cover slowly and firmly, and open it completely until it stops. If any jammed paper is removed when the top cover is not opened completely, it may result in damage to the printer.

2

Pull out the paper cassette.

3

Open the multi-purpose tray, open the toner cover, and then remove the toner cartridge.

7

4

Close the toner cover, then close the multi-purpose tray.

Paper Jams 7-29

5

Remove the bottom rear cover.

7

6

Make sure that there is no paper remaining in the area from the back to the inside of the printer.

7-30 Paper Jams

7

Set the bottom rear cover.

8

Set the paper cassette.

9

Open the multi-purpose tray, open the toner cover, and then install the toner cartridge.

10

Close the toner cover, then close the multi-purpose tray.

11

Close the top cover.

7

Paper Jams 7-31

7

When the duplex unit is installed

1

Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer OFF a , then unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet b .

OFF

ON a b

2

Remove all interface cables and the power cord.

3

Open the top cover.

IMPORTANT

Raise the top cover slowly and firmly, and open it completely until it stops. If any jammed paper is removed when the top cover is not opened completely, it may result in damage to the printer.

4

Pull out the paper cassette.

5

Open the multi-purpose tray, open the toner cover, and then remove the toner cartridge.

6

Close the toner cover, then close the multi-purpose tray.

7-32 Paper Jams

7

Open the duplex unit rear cover.

Holding the grip at the center of the printer, open the duplex unit rear cover.

7

Paper Jams 7-33

7

8

Push up the lock release levers on each side of the duplex unit a , then remove the duplex unit b .

a a b

7-34 Paper Jams

9

Close the duplex unit rear cover, then place the duplex unit on a flat surface as shown in the figure.

10

Open the duplex unit bottom cover.

7

Paper Jams 7-35

11

Remove any jammed paper.

7

12

Close the duplex unit bottom cover.

7-36 Paper Jams

13

If the paper feeder is installed, make sure that there is no paper remaining in the area from the back to the inside of the printer.

14

To install the duplex unit, hold it upright and match the positioning pins on the holes on the back of the printer.

Push the duplex unit firmly until it clicks.

7

Positioning pin

Paper Jams 7-37

7

15

Set the paper cassette.

16

Open the multi-purpose tray, open the toner cover, and then install the toner cartridge.

17

Close the toner cover, then close the multi-purpose tray.

18

Close the top cover.

19

Connect all interface cables and the power cord to the printer.

20

Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.

21

Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer ON.

7-38 Paper Jams

Service Call Display

When a problem has occurred and the printer does not work properly, the Alarm indicator (red) illuminates and the following service call shown in the figure appears.

Paper

Alarm

Ready

On

If the service call appears, cycle the power of the printer using the following procedure. The message may disappear.

1

Turn the power OFF, wait for 3 seconds or longer, then turn it

ON again.

OFF

ON

7

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

If the message does not reappear, the printer is functioning properly. If the error message still appears, proceed to the next step.

Service Call Display 7-39

2

Note down the error code displayed in the Printer Status

Window.

7

3

Turn the power of the printer printer OFF a , then unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet b .

b

OFF

ON a

4

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

When contacting your Canon dealer, please report the problems and the error code that you have noted.

7-40 Service Call Display

Print Quality Problems

If any problem occurs while you are using the printer, take the following measures depending on the symptoms.

IMPORTANT

• If a message appears in the Printer Status Window, take measurements according to the message.

For details on removing paper jams, see "Paper Jams," on p. 7-4.

If a symptom that is not indicated in this section occurs, if none of the indicated remedies do not solve the problem, or if you cannot determine the problem, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

White streaks appear.

Cause 1 The life of the toner cartridge has been reached or toner is not distributed evenly.

Remedy Take the toner cartridge out of the printer, shake it gently 5 or 6 times to evenly distribute the toner, and then reinstall the toner cartridge. If this does not solve

the problem, replace the toner cartridge with a new one. (See "Replacing the

Toner Cartridge," on p. 5-2)

Cause 2 The transport roller is dirty.

Remedy

Clean the transport roller. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge," on p. 5-2)

Cause 3 The transfer roller or photosensitive drum in the toner cartridge is dirty.

Remedy

Clean the transfer roller and photosensitive drum. (See "Cleaning the Transfer

Roller and Photosensitive Drum," on p. 5-26)

Cause 4 The photosensitive drum in the toner cartridge is deteriorating or damaged.

Remedy

Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. (See "Replacing the Toner

Cartridge," on p. 5-2)

Printed pages have white specks.

Cause 1 Paper is inappropriate.

Remedy

Replace the paper with a type that can be printed and print again. (See "Paper

Requirements," on p. 2-2)

7

Print Quality Problems 7-41

7

Cause 2 The transport roller is dirty.

Remedy

Clean the transport roller. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge," on p. 5-2)

Cause 3 Paper is damp since the paper has been stored in unsuitable condition.

Remedy

Change the paper with new one and print again. (See "Paper Requirements," on p. 2-2)

Cause 4 The transfer roller or photosensitive drum in the toner cartridge is dirty.

Remedy

Clean the transfer roller and photosensitive drum. (See "Cleaning the Transfer

Roller and Photosensitive Drum," on p. 5-26)

Cause 5 The photosensitive drum in the toner cartridge is deteriorating.

Remedy

Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. (See "Replacing the Toner

Cartridge," on p. 5-2)

Residual images appear on non-printed areas.

Cause 1 Printing paper is inappropriate.

Remedy

Change the paper or transparencies and print again. (See "Paper

Requirements," on p. 2-2)

Cause 2 The photosensitive drum in the toner cartridge is deteriorating.

Remedy

Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. (See "Replacing the Toner

Cartridge," on p. 5-2)

Cause 3 Paper of a wider width was printed just after paper with a width of Letter wide

(279.4 mm) or narrower was printed continuously.

Remedy To lower the temperature of the fixing unit, wait for a while before printing again.

The overall print result is faint.

Cause 1 The setting for [Toner Density] is not appropriate.

Remedy Drag the [Toner Density] slider in the printer driver toward [Dark].

In order to specify the setting for [Toner Density], click the [Details] button in the

[Quality] sheet to open the [Detailed Settings] dialog box.

Cause 2 [Use Toner Save] is selected.

Remedy Remove the checkmark from [Use Toner Save] in the printer driver.

In order to specify the setting for [Use Toner Save], click the [Details] button in the [Quality] sheet to open the [Detailed Settings] dialog box.

7-42 Print Quality Problems

The overall print result is dark.

Cause 1 The setting for [Toner Density] is not appropriate.

Remedy Drag the [Toner Density] slider in the printer driver toward [Light].

In order to specify the setting for [Toner Density], click the [Details] button in the

[Quality] sheet to open the [Detailed Settings] dialog box.

Cause 2 The printer is exposed to direct sunlight or strong light.

Remedy Move the printer to a place where it will not be exposed to direct sunlight or strong light. Alternatively, move the strong light source away from the printer.

The print is uneven.

Cause 1 Life of the toner cartridge has been reached.

Remedy Take the toner cartridge out of the printer, shake it gently 5 or 6 times to evenly distribute the toner, and then reinstall the toner cartridge. If this does not solve

the problem, replace the toner cartridge with a new one. (See "Replacing the

Toner Cartridge," on p. 5-2)

Cause 2 Paper is too moist or too dry.

Remedy

Change the paper with appropriate one and print again. (See "Paper

Requirements," on p. 2-2)

Cause 3 The toner cartridge is deteriorating or damaged.

Remedy

Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. (See "Replacing the Toner

Cartridge," on p. 5-2)

Front or back of the printouts is stained with black dots.

Cause The fixing roller is dirty.

Remedy

Clean the fixing roller. (See "Cleaning the Fixing Roller," on p. 5-21)

Smudge marks of spattering toner appear around the text.

Cause This kind of phenomenon may occur when printing text data.

Remedy Display the Printer Status Window, select [Device Settings] from the [Options] menu, and then remove the checkmark from [Graphics Special Mode] in the

[Device Settings] dialog box.

7

Print Quality Problems 7-43

7

Images on printed paper are attached with dots (foamy dots).

Cause This kind of phenomenon may occur when printing graphics data (graphics, tables, or charts) that contains many halftones.

Remedy Display the Printer Status Window, select [Device Settings] from the [Options] menu, and then place a checkmark for [Graphics Special Mode] in the [Device

Settings] dialog box.

A portion of a page is not printed.

Cause 1 The scale factor is incorrect.

Remedy 1 Remove the checkmark from [Manual Scaling] in the printer driver. If you remove the checkmark, the scale factor will be set according to [Page Size] and

[Output Size] automatically.

In order to specify the setting for [Manual Scaling], open the [Page Setup] sheet.

Remedy 2 Place a checkmark for [Manual Scaling] in the printer driver and specify an appropriate scale factor according to the paper size to be used.

In order to specify the setting for [Manual Scaling], open the [Page Setup] sheet.

Cause 2 The position of the paper is incorrect.

Remedy

Load the paper properly. (See "Printing from a Paper Cassette," on p. 2-17,

"Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray," on p. 2-57)

Cause 3 A document with no margins was printed.

Remedy Data cannot be printed within a 5 mm margin (10 mm for envelopes) on all sides of the paper. Therefore, you should secure a margin of 5 mm or more (10 mm or more for envelopes) around the data.

Print position is misaligned.

Cause 1 [Gutter] is specified.

Remedy Specify [Gutter] in the printer driver to "0".

In order to specify the setting for [Gutter], click the [Gutter] button in the

[Finishing] sheet to open the [Gutter Settings] dialog box. In order to specify the setting for [Gutter] for booklet printing, select [Booklet Printing] for [Print Style] in the [Finishing] sheet, and then click the [Booklet] button to open the [Detailed

Settings for Booklet] dialog box for [Specify Booklet Gutter].

7-44 Print Quality Problems

Cause 2 "Top Margin" and "Paper Position" in the application are not specified properly.

Remedy Specify the settings for "Top Margin" and "Paper Position" in the application properly. (See the instruction manual supplied with your application)

The next page is printed from halfway through the previous page.

Cause "Line Spacing" or "Lines/Page" in the application is not specified properly.

Remedy Specify the settings for "Line Spacing" and "Lines/Page" in the application so that data fits in one page, and print again. (See the instruction manual supplied with your application)

Nothing is printed on paper.

Cause 1 The toner cartridge was installed with the sealing tape still attached.

Remedy Take the toner cartridge out of the printer, pull out the sealing tape, and reinstall

the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge," on p. 5-2)

Cause 2 A few sheets of paper were fed at a time.

Remedy Align the paper stack in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray properly and load it again. If you are using transparencies or labels, fan them thoroughly and

load them again. (See "Printing from a Paper Cassette," on p. 2-17, "Printing from the Multi-purpose Tray," on p. 2-57)

Cause 3 A problem has occurred inside the printer.

Remedy 1 If "Service Error" is displayed in the Printer Status Window, turn the power OFF, wait for 3 seconds or longer, and then turn the power ON again. The message may disappear.

Remedy 2 If the message does not disappear after applying the Remedy 1, contact your local Canon dealer for servicing.

Paper comes out completely black.

Cause 1 The photosensitive drum in the toner cartridge is deteriorating.

Remedy

Replace the toner cartridge with new one. (See "Replacing the Toner

Cartridge," on p. 5-2)

Cause 2 A problem has occurred inside the printer.

Remedy 1 If "Service Error" is displayed in the Printer Status Window, turn the power OFF, wait for 3 seconds or longer, and then turn the power ON again. The message may disappear.

7

Print Quality Problems 7-45

7

Remedy 2 If the message does not disappear after applying the Remedy 1, contact your local Canon dealer for servicing.

Toner does not fix onto paper completely.

Cause 1 Paper is inappropriate.

Remedy

Replace the paper with a type that can be used with this printer. (See "Paper

Requirements," on p. 2-2)

Cause 2 Toner does not fix well.

Remedy Select the appropriate fixing mode from [Fixing Mode] in the printer driver.

In order to specify the setting for [Fixing Mode], click the [Finishing Details] button in the [Finishing] sheet and the [Advanced Settings] button in the

[Finishing Details] dialog box to open the [Advanced Settings] dialog box. [Mode

3] enhances the toner fixing the most, and [Mode 2] and [Mode 1] follow respectively. [Mode 4] enhances the toner fixing the least.

Colored lines and text come out faint.

Cause Thin lines or text are being used.

Remedy Place a checkmark for [Print Colored Text and Lines in Black] in the printer driver.

In order to specify the setting for [Print Colored Text and Lines in Black], click the [Details] button in the [Quality] sheet to open the [Detailed Settings] dialog box.

Colored text appears to be blurred.

Cause A bold font is being used for the colored text.

Remedy Select [Perceptual [Monitor Color Matched]] for [Matching Method] in the printer driver.

In order to specify the setting for [Matching Method], place a checkmark for

[Manual Grayscale Settings] in the [Quality] sheet, then click the [Grayscale

Settings] button to open the [Matching] sheet.

7-46 Print Quality Problems

Paper Problems

Paper comes out wrinkled.

Cause 1 Paper is not loaded in the paper cassette properly.

Remedy

Load paper in the paper cassette properly. (See "Printing from a Paper

Cassette," on p. 2-17)

Cause 2 Paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray at an angle.

Remedy

Load the paper in the multi-purpose tray straight. (See "Printing from the

Multi-purpose Tray," on p. 2-57)

Cause 3 Paper is damp.

Remedy Replace paper with paper from a new stack.

Paper curls.

Cause 1 Paper is inappropriate.

Remedy

Replace the paper with a type that can be used with this printer. (See "Paper

Requirements," on p. 2-2)

Cause 2 The Paper Type setting does not match the loaded paper.

Remedy Select [Plain Paper L] for [Paper Type] in the printer driver.

In order to specify the setting for [Paper Type], open the [Paper Source] sheet.

White dust is attached to the printed transparencies.

Cause The transparencies were printed just after another type of paper was printed continuously.

Remedy If you print continuously on another type of paper before printing on transparencies, the transparencies may come out with chipped paper attached.

In this case, wipe and remove the chipped paper with a soft cloth.

Paper jams occur when performing automatic 2-sided printing.

Cause 1 Paper is damp.

Remedy Replace the paper with paper from a new stack and print again.

7

Paper Problems 7-47

7

Cause 2 The Paper Type setting does not match the loaded paper.

Remedy Display the Printer Status Window, select [Device Settings] from the [Options] menu, and then place a checkmark for [2-sided Special Mode] in the [Device

Settings] dialog box.

Paper jams occur when performing 2-sided printing manually.

Cause This kind of phenomenon may occur when using curled or thin paper.

Remedy Place a checkmark for [Print on the Back of Printed Paper from the

Multi-purpose Tray] in the printer driver.

In order to specify the setting for [Print on the Back of Printed Paper from the

Multi-purpose Tray], click the [Finishing Details] button in the [Finishing] sheet and the [Advanced Settings] button in the [Finishing Details] dialog box to open the [Advanced Settings] dialog box.

7-48 Paper Problems

When Nothing is Printed

Check the following items if nothing is printed when performing printing from the application:

1

Check if any error message is displayed in the Printer Status

Window.

IMPORTANT

If not, uninstall the CAPT software and install it again. (See "Uninstalling the CAPT

Software," on p. 3-77)

2

Print a test page.

Click [Print Test Page] in the [General] sheet in the [Printer Properties] dialog box.

When the test page is printed correctly

Printing can be performed from the CAPT software. Check your application to make sure that all the settings are specified properly.

When the test page cannot be printed

Uninstall the CAPT software, reinstall it, and print a test page again. (See "Uninstalling the

CAPT Software," on p. 3-77)

7

When Nothing is Printed 7-49

7

Installation Problems

If "USB Class Driver" and "LBP3600 Printer Driver" cannot be installed properly, perform the following procedure to check problems.

NOTE

For details on problems on the network installation, see "Chapter 4 Troubleshooting" in

Network Guide.

[Canon Printer Uninstaller] is displayed in [Programs]

([All Programs] for

Windows XP/Server 2003) from the [Start] menu.

Yes

Cannot install.

No

Uninstall the CAPT software with Uninstaller.

See "Uninstalling the CAPT

Software," on p. 3-77.

[Canon LBP3600] is displayed in

[Add/Remove Programs]

([Add or Remove Programs] for Windows XP/Server 2003).

Yes

Delete [Canon LBP3600] from

[Add/Remove Programs] ([Add or

Remove Programs] for Windows

XP/Server 2003).

See "When Uninstallation Fails," on p. 7-51.

No

Uninstall the USB class driver.

See "Uninstalling the USB Class

Driver," on p. 7-53.

Install the CAPT software again.

See "Installing the CAPT Software," on p. 3-4.

Install the CAPT software again.

See "Installing the CAPT Software," on p. 3-4.

Cannot install.

Uninstall the CAPT software with Uninstaller.

See "Uninstalling the CAPT

Software," on p. 3-77.

Install the CAPT software again.

See "Installing the CAPT Software," on p. 3-4.

Cannot install.

[Canon Printer Uninstaller] is displayed in [Programs] ([All

Programs] for Windows XP/Server

2003) from the [Start] menu.

No

[Canon LBP3600] is displayed in

[Add/Remove Programs] ([Add or

Remove Programs] for Windows

XP/Server 2003).

Yes

Uninstall the CAPT software with Uninstaller.

See "Uninstalling the CAPT

Software," on p. 3-77.

Yes

Cannot install.

Delete [Canon LBP3600] from

[Add/Remove Programs] ([Add or

Remove Programs] for Windows

XP/Server 2003).

See "When Uninstallation Fails," on p. 7-51.

No

Uninstall the USB class driver.

See "Uninstalling the USB Class

Driver," on p. 7-53.

Install the CAPT software again.

See "Installing the CAPT Software," on p. 3-4.

7-50 Installation Problems

When Uninstallation Fails

If you cannot uninstall the CAPT software with the Uninstaller that was created during installation, perform the following procedure to uninstall the CAPT software from [Add/Remove Programs] ([Add or Remove Programs] for Windows XP/Server

2003).

1

From the [Start] menu, select [Settings]

[Control Panel], and then double-click [Add/Remove Programs].

For Windows Server XP: From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Add or Remove Programs].

For Windows Server 2003: From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] ➞ [Add or Remove Programs].

2

Select the name for this printer in the [Add/Remove Programs] dialog box, then click [Change/Remove].

For Windows XP/Server 2003: Select the name for this printer in the [Add or

Remove Programs] dialog box, then click [Change/Remove].

For Windows 98/Me: Select the name for this printer in the [Add/Remove

Programs Properties] dialog box, then click [Add/Remove].

7

NOTE

If the name for this printer is not displayed in the [Add/Remove Programs] dialog box (the [Add or Remove Programs] dialog box for Windows XP/Server 2003),

perform "Uninstalling the USB Class Driver" (See p. 7-53), then install the CAPT

software again.

Installation Problems 7-51

3

Select the name for this printer, then click [Delete].

7

4

Click [Yes].

Uninstallation starts. Please wait until it is completed.

5

Click [Exit].

The [Delete Printer] dialog box closes.

6

Restart Windows.

7-52 Installation Problems

Uninstalling the USB Class Driver

Uninstalling the USB class driver is required when you cannot install the CAPT software properly after uninstalling it once or when you cannot uninstall the CAPT software.

1

Make sure that the computer is connected to the printer with the USB cable and that the power of the printer is turned ON.

2

From the [Start] menu, select [Settings]

[Control Panel], and then double-click [Add/Remove Programs].

For Windows Server XP: From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Add or Remove Programs].

For Windows Server 2003: From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] ➞ [Add or Remove Programs].

3

Make sure that [Canon LBP3600] is not displayed in the [Add/

Remove Programs] dialog box, and then click [ ].

For Windows XP/Server 2003: Make sure that [Canon LBP3600] is not displayed in the [Add or Remove Programs] dialog box, and then click [ ].

7

Installation Problems 7-53

NOTE

If [Canon LBP3600] is displayed in the [Add/Remove Programs] dialog box (the

[Add or Remove Programs] dialog box for Windows XP/Server 2003), see

"Uninstalling the USB Class Driver," on p. 7-53 to delete [Canon LBP3600] in the

[Add/Remove Programs] dialog box (the [Add or Remove Programs] dialog box for

Windows XP/Server 2003).

4

From the [Start] menu, select [Settings]

[Control Panel], and then double-click the [System] icon.

For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003: From the [Start] menu, select [Control

Panel], and then click [System].

For Windows XP Home Edition: From the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers and Other Hardware] ➞ [System].

7

5

Click [Hardware]

[Device Manager], and then double-click

[Universal Serial Bus controllers].

For Windows 98/Me: Display the [System Properties] dialog box, click the

[Device Manager] tab, and then double-click [Universal Serial Bus controllers].

7-54 Installation Problems

6

Select [USB Printing Support], then select [Remove] in the

[Action] menu.

For Windows 98, select [Canon LBP3600], for Windows Me, select [Canon CAPT

USB Device], and then click [Remove].

IMPORTANT

• If the USB class driver is under [Other Devices], the installation has not been performed properly. According to your operating system, select and delete any one of [Canon LBP3600], [Canon CAPT USB Device], or [Unknown devices].

• Never delete other devices or device drivers. If you delete them by mistake,

Windows may not operate properly.

• If the USB class driver is not installed properly, [USB Printing Support] (for

Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003), [Canon CAPT USB Device] (for Windows Me), or

[Canon LBP3600] (for Windows 98) is not displayed.

7

7

When the [Confirm Device Removal] dialog box appears, click

[OK].

8

Click [Close].

[System Properties] closes.

Installation Problems 7-55

7

9

Disconnect the USB cable from the computer, then restart

Windows.

After Windows starts up again, reinstall the CAPT software. (See "Installing the

CAPT Software," on p. 3-4)

Problems During Local Installation

When installing the printer driver from the CD-ROM, the printer is not recognized automatically even after the USB cable is connected.

Cause 1 The USB cable has already been connected and the printer is turned ON before installing the printer driver.

Remedy Turn the power of the printer OFF and disconnect the USB cable. Then, connect the USB cable again and turn the printer ON.

Cause 2 The power of the printer is turned OFF.

Remedy Turn the power of the printer ON.

Cause 3 The USB cable is not connected properly.

Remedy Make sure that the printer and computer are connected with the USB cable properly.

Cause 4 An inappropriate USB cable is being used.

Remedy Use a USB cable appropriate for the USB interface environment of this printer.

The USB interface environment of this printer is USB 2.0 High-Speed (Windows

2000/XP/Server 2003 only) and USB Full-Speed (USB1.1 equivalent).

[Local Printer]* cannot be selected in the [Add Printer Wizard] dialog box (Windows 2000/XP/

Server 2003).

Cause Installation was performed by a user who is not a member of Administrators or

Power Users.

Remedy Install the CAPT (Canon Advanced Printing Technology) software as a user who is a member of Administrators.

*For Windows XP/Server 2003: Select [Local printer attached to this computer].

7-56 Installation Problems

Installation Problems When the Printer is Shared on a

Network

The print server to be connected cannot be found.

Cause 1 The print server has not been started up.

Remedy Start up the print server.

Cause 2 The printer is not specified as a shared printer.

Remedy Specify the printer as a shared printer in the [Printer Properties] dialog box.

Cause 3 The user does not have permission to access the print server or printer.

Remedy Ask your network administrator to change the user permissions.

7

Installation Problems 7-57

7

Miscellaneous Problems

NOTE

For details on problems on installing the optional network board, see "Chapter 4

Troubleshooting" in Network Guide.

LBP3600 does not function properly.

Cause 1 LBP3600 is not specified as the default printer.

Remedy Specify it as the default printer.

Cause 2 The CAPT software may not be installed properly.

Remedy In order to check if the CAPT software is installed properly, print from the application. If you cannot print properly, uninstall the CAPT software and install

it again. (See "Uninstalling the CAPT Software," on p. 3-77, "Installing the

CAPT Software," on p. 3-4)

The printer stops printing temporarily during printing.

Cause 1 The temperature of the fixing unit exceeded a certain degree limit by a continuous job (especially by printing paper of a narrow width).

Remedy Wait for a while. The printer automatically cools down the fixing unit. The printer resumes the paused job after cooling down the fixing unit.

Cause 2 In case paper of a wider width is printed after paper of a narrower width is printed, the printer cools down the fixing unit to keep the print quality high.

Remedy Wait for a while. The printer automatically cools down the fixing unit. After cooling down the fixing unit, the printer stops running and becomes ready to print. In case during printing, the printer resumes the job after cooling down the fixing unit.

CD-ROM Setup does not appear automatically.

Cause 1 [Always Display when CD is Inserted] in CD-ROM Setup is not selected.

Remedy Right-click the CD-ROM drive icon in [My Computer] and select [Open] to display CD-ROM Setup manually. Select [Always Display when CD is Inserted].

7-58 Miscellaneous Problems

Cause 2 [Auto Insert Notification] is not selected. (Windows 98/Me only)

Remedy Display the properties for the CD-ROM drive from [Device Manager] and select

[Auto Insert Notification] in the [Settings] sheet.

The error message "File not found on CD-ROM." appears when CD-ROM Setup starts up.

Cause The program is loaded from the hard disk.

Remedy Browse [CNAB1MNU.EXE] using the browse function of your computer, delete the CNAB1MNU.EXE file from the hard disk, and then start up CD-ROM Setup from the supplied CD-ROM "LBP3600 User Software".

The message, "Toner Cover Open" appears in the Printer Status Window.

Cause 1 The toner cover is open.

Remedy Close the toner cover. If you cannot close the toner cover, check if the toner cartridge is set properly. If you close the toner cover forcefully, this may cause damage to the printer.

Cause 2 The top rear cover is not set properly.

Remedy Check if the top rear cover is set properly. If the top rear cover is not set

properly, take the cover out once, and then set it again, properly. (See "Moving the Printer," on p. 5-37)

The message, "Duplex Unit is not attached correctly" appears in the Printer Status Window.

Cause 1 The duplex unit is not installed properly.

Remedy Turn the power of the printer OFF, then install the duplex unit again, properly.

Cause 2 The top rear cover is not set properly.

Remedy Check if the top rear cover is set properly. If the top rear cover is not set

properly, take the cover out once, and then set it again, properly. (See "Moving the Printer," on p. 5-37)

7

Miscellaneous Problems 7-59

7

Confirming the Printer Features

This printer features Printer Status Print that allows you to confirm the optional settings of the printer, settings for [Device Settings] in the [Options] menu in Printer

Status Window, and the current printer status such as the total number of printouts.

This printer also offers Network Status Print that allows you to confirm the version of the optional network board or TCP/IP settings. Use these functions when required after installing and connecting the printer, for example when you want to check the operation.

NOTE

• Printer Status Print is designed to be printed on A4 size paper. Load A4 size paper.

• For details on Network Status Print, see "Chapter 4 Troubleshooting" in Network Guide.

1

Display the Printer Status Window.

For details on procedures for displaying the Printer Status Window, see

"Displaying the Printer Status Window," on p. 4-81.

7-60 Confirming the Printer Features

2

From the [Options] menu, select [Utility]

[Printer Status

Print].

3

Click [OK].

Printer Status Print is printed.

4

Confirm the contents of the Printer Status Print.

Printer Status Print prints information as shown in the following figure. You can confirm the optional settings of the printer, settings for [Device Settings] in the

[Options] menu in Printer Status Window, and the current printer status such as the total number of printouts.

7

Confirming the Printer Features 7-61

IMPORTANT

This is a sample of Status Print. The contents may differ from the Status Print printed by your computer.

7

7-62 Confirming the Printer Features

Appendix

8

CHAPTER

This chapter describes the printer specifications and index.

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2

Software Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3

Dimensions of Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Print Monitor Installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Location of the Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

8-1

Specifications

8

8-2

Hardware Specifications

Type

Printing method

Operating environment

(Printer unit only)

Desk-top Page Printer

Electrophoto Method (On-demand fixing)

Print speed

Plain paper (64 - 80 g/m

Warm-up time

First print time

2 )

Cassette 1

When printing A4 continuously: 22 pages/min.

* Print speed may drop in stages depending on the paper size, paper type, print copies, and the settings of the fixing mode. (This is because the safety function that prevents damage caused by heat becomes active.)

0 second (9 seconds or less when the printer is ON)

8.6* seconds (When printing A4)

* May vary depending on the output environment. (Max.

9.5 seconds or less)

A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Executive

Paper capacity: approx. 250 sheets (64 g/m 2 )

A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Executive

Paper capacity: approx. 250 sheets (64 g/m 2 )

Paper size

Cassette 2

(Optional)

Cassette 3

(Optional)

Cassette 4

(Optional)

Multi-purpose tray

Width: 76.2 - 297.0 mm

Length: 127.0 - 431.8 mm

(Custom size paper can be loaded only in portrait orientation)

Paper capacity: approx. 100 sheets (64 g/m 2 )

Automatic 2-sided printing A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Legal, Ledger, Letter, Executive

Output orientation

Output capacity

Noise level (Bystander position) (Noise rating number based on ISO9296)

A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Executive

Paper capacity: approx. 250 sheets (64 g/m 2 )

A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Executive

Paper capacity: approx. 250 sheets (64 g/m 2 )

Face-down

Output tray: approx. 250 sheets (64 g/m 2 )

During standby: Max. 30 dB [A]

During print: Max. 50 dB [A]

Operating environment temperature:

10 to 32.5 °C (50 to 90.5 °F)

Humidity: 20 to 80 % RH (no condensation)

Specifications

Storage environment

(Printer unit only)

Host interface

User interface

Expansion slot

Power

Power consumption

(at temperature of 20 °C or

68 °F)

Consumables

Weight

Toner cartridge

Storage environment temperature: 0 to 35 °C (32 to 95

°F)

Humidity: 10 to 80 % RH (no condensation)

USB interface

* Windows 98/Me: USB Full-Speed (USB1.1 equivalent)

* Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: USB 2.0 Hi-Speed/

USB Full-Speed (USB1.1 equivalent)

3 LED indicators

1

AC 100 V ± 10 % (50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz)

Average during operation: approx. 474 W* 1

Average during standby: approx. 12 W* 1

Maximum: 915 W* 2 or less

* 1 When the optional accessories are not installed.

* 2 Power consumption is 960 W or less when all the optional accessories are installed. However, the instantaneous peak on startup shall not be counted.

EP-66 Cartridge

Number of printable pages: approx. 10,000* pages

* When performing 1-sided printing on A4 size paper at 5

% printing ratio.

Printer unit

(excluding the toner cartridge) .................approx. 19.9 kg

Toner cartridge .........................................approx. 2.0 kg

250-sheet universal cassette UC-66A* ....approx. 1.5 kg

250-sheet universal cassette UC-66B* ....approx. 1.5 kg

250-sheet paper feeder unit PF-66

(including the cassette)*...........................approx. 7.8 kg

250-sheet paper feeder unit PF-66E

(including the cassette)*...........................approx 6.4 kg

Duplex unit*..............................................approx. 4.6 kg

* mark indicates optional products.

Software Specifications

Printing software

Printable area

CAPT (Canon Advanced Printing Technology)

Data cannot be printed within a 5 mm margin on all sides of the paper. (For envelopes, 10 mm margin on all sides)

8

Specifications 8-3

8

Dimensions of Each Part

Printer

• Standard state

Front Surface

130

68

Paper cassette

(when extended)

Multi-purpose tray

Auxiliary tray

Paper size cover

196 456

• State with the paper feeders installed

Front Surface

Cassette protective cover

456 166

• State with the duplex unit installed

Front Surface

Duplex unit rear cover

8-4 Dimensions of Each Part

524 137

Top cover

(mm)

(mm)

Duplex unit top cover

Duplex unit rear cover

(mm)

• State with the paper feeders and duplex unit installed

Front Surface

Duplex unit rear cover

Cassette protective cover Duplex unit top cover

Duplex unit rear cover

524

98

39

250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66

622

136 111

(mm)

(mm)

8

250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66E

622

500

127 88

(mm)

Dimensions of Each Part 8-5

8

Duplex Unit DU-66

135

209

494

386

326

190

327

(mm)

8-6 Dimensions of Each Part

Print Monitor Installer

The supplied CD-ROM includes "Print Monitor Installer" that creates the port

(Canon CAPT Print Monitor) for connecting your computer to the printer on a TCP/

IP network, as well as the printing software (CAPT). For details on Canon CAPT

Print Monitor, see "Network Guide".

NOTE

When the printer driver is installed from CD-ROM Setup, the port (Canon CAPT Print

Monitor) is created automatically. Use "Print Monitor Installer" as needed when you want to create the port without using CD-ROM Setup.

8

Print Monitor Installer 8-7

Index

Numerics

100 Indicator, 6-40

2-sided Printing

Automatic 2-sided Printing, 2-77

Loading Paper, 2-80

Performing 2-sided Printing Manually, 2-83

8

A

Add Printer Wizard

Windows 2000, 3-30

Windows 98/Me, 3-17

Windows XP/Server 2003, 3-44

Adjusting the Printing Position, 5-28

Administrators Permission, 3-21, 3-26, 3-30,

3-37, 3-41

Advanced Settings, 4-29

[Advanced] Sheet, 4-36

Alarm Indicator, 1-6, 7-3

Auxiliary Tray, 1-4

B

B & W Halftones, 4-66

Binding Location, 4-28

Booklet, 4-27

Borders, 4-54

Bottom Rear Cover, 1-5

Brightness, 4-67

C

Canon CAPT Print Monitor, 8-7

Canon Printer Uninstaller, 3-52

CAPT (Canon Advanced Printing Technology),

3-4

Cleaning

Fixing Roller, 5-21

Photosensitive Drum, 5-26

Printer, 5-35

Transfer Roller, 5-26

Client, 3-57, 3-67

[Configuration] Sheet (Windows 98/Me), 4-37

Continue Printing with the Multi-purpose Tray,

4-31

Contrast, 4-68

Copies, 4-24

Custom Paper Size, 4-25, 4-52

D

Delete Job, 4-7

Delivery Guide Inner Cover, 1-5

Details, 4-28, 4-32

[Details] Sheet, 4-34

[Device Settings] Sheet (Windows 2000/XP/

Server 2003), 4-37

Dimensions, 8-4

Document Properties

Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, 4-14, 4-15,

4-22

Windows 98/Me, 4-10, 4-22

Download and Installation, 3-57, 3-68

Duplex Unit, 4-37, 6-28

Duplex Unit

Installation, 6-32

Installation Space, 6-29

Parts and Functions, 6-30

Removal, 6-34

Duplex Unit Connector, 1-5

8-8 Index

E

Edit and Preview, 4-75

Edit Watermark, 4-26

EMF Spooling, 4-62

Enable Image Correction, 4-66

Envelope, 2-5, 2-67

ERR Indicator, 6-40

Expansion Slot, 1-4

F

Finishing, 4-28, 4-60

Finishing Details, 4-29

[Finishing] Sheet, 4-27

Fixing Mode, 4-62

Foot Positions, 6-8

G

Gamma, 4-68

[General] Sheet, 4-34

Get Device Status, 4-37

[Grayscale Adjustment] Sheet, 4-32

Grayscale Settings, 4-32

Grips for Moving, 1-4

Gutter, 4-28, 4-59

H

Heavy Paper, 2-4, 2-17, 2-58

I

Image Refinement, 4-62

Important Safety Instructions, xii

Indicators, 1-3

Installation

Windows 2000, 3-21

Windows 98/Me, 3-5

Windows XP/Server 2003, 3-36

Installation on Clients, 3-67

Installation Problems, 7-50

L

Label, 2-4, 2-58

LAN

Cable, 1-15

Connector, 6-40

Laser Beam, xv

Layout Options, 4-26

Left Cover, 1-5

LNK Indicator, 6-40

Loading Paper

Envelope, 2-67

Heavy Paper, 2-17, 2-58

Label, 2-58

Multi-purpose Tray, 2-57

Paper Cassette, 2-17

Transparency, 2-58

Local Installation, 3-57

Local Printer, 3-18, 3-31, 3-46

M

MAC Address, 6-40

Manual Grayscale Settings, 4-32, 4-67

Manual Scaling, 4-25

Matching Method, 4-68

Matching Mode, 4-68

[Matching] Sheet, 4-33

Maximum Power Consumption, 8-3

Miscellaneous Problems, 7-58

Monitor Profile, 4-68

Moving the Printer, 5-37

Multi-purpose Tray, 1-4

N

NB-C1, 6-38

Network Board, 6-38

Network Board

Index 8-9

8

Installation, 6-41

Parts and Functions, 6-40

Removal, 6-51

Reset, 6-48

Setting the DIP Switches, 6-45

Network Environment, 1-15, 3-57

O

Objective, 4-31, 4-65

Online Help, 4-23

Optional Accessories, 6-2

Output Size, 4-24

Output Tray, 1-3

8

P

Page Layout, 4-24

Page Order, 4-25

[Page Setup] Sheet, 4-23

Page Size, 4-23

PageComposer, 4-77

Paper

Printable Area, 2-6

Storage, 2-8

Storing Printouts, 2-9

Paper Cassette, 1-4

Paper Delivery Area

Output Tray, 2-15

Paper Capacity, 2-16

Paper Feeder

250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66, 6-6

250-sheet Paper Feeder Unit PF-66E, 6-6

Installation, 6-20

Installation Space, 6-8

Parts and Functions, 6-9

Removal, 6-25

Paper Guide, 1-4

Paper Indicator, 1-6

Paper Jams, 7-4

Paper Orientation

Cassette 1, 2-22

Cassette 2, 3, and 4, 2-29

8-10 Index

Multi-purpose Tray (Other than Envelopes),

2-61

Paper Problems, 7-47

Paper Retaining Lever, 1-4

Paper Selection, 4-30, 4-63

Paper Size

Abbreviations of Paper Sizes, 2-6

Change, 2-32

List, 2-3

Paper Size Cover, 1-5

Paper Size Dial, 1-5

Paper Size Guide, 1-4

Paper Size Slot, 1-5

Paper Source, 4-30

Paper Source

Paper Capacity, 2-11

Selection, 2-12

Type, 2-10

Paper Source Options, 4-19, 4-37

[Paper Source] Sheet, 4-29

Paper Type, 4-30

Paper Type List, 2-3

Parts and Their Functions, 1-3

Pause Job, 4-7

Pause When Printing from the Multi-purpose

Tray, 4-31

Peripheral Space, 6-8

Plain Paper, 2-4

Plug and Play

Windows 2000, 3-26

Windows 98/Me, 3-10

Windows XP/Server 2003, 3-41

[Ports] Sheet, 4-35

Poster Printing, 4-45

Power

Power Switch, 1-3

Power Socket, 1-5

Preview, 4-40

Print Colored Text and Lines in Black, 4-66

Print Grayscale Sample, 4-33, 4-68

Print Last Page in 1-sided Mode When 2-sided

Printing is Set, 4-62

Print Monitor Installer, 8-7

Print on the Back of Printed Paper from the

Multi-purpose Tray, 4-62

Print Quality Problems, 7-41

Print Server, 3-58

Print Server Settings

Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, 3-62

Windows 98/Me, 3-58

Print with Mixed Paper Sizes/Orientations, 4-27,

4-57

Printer

Moving the Printer, 5-37

Parts and Their Functions, 1-3

Precautions for Handling, 5-45

Storage, 5-46

Printer Connector, 6-40

Printer Driver

Installation, 3-4

Uninstallation, 3-77

Printer Features, 7-60

Printer Name, 3-16, 3-20, 3-34, 3-49

Printer Properties

Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, 4-17, 4-23

Windows 98/Me, 4-12, 4-22

Printer Sharing Settings

Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, 3-64

Windows 98/Me, 3-61

Printer Status Window

Device Settings Menu, 4-84

Display, 4-81

Parts and Functions, 4-79

Preferences, 4-82

Refresh, 4-85

Resolve Error, 4-85

Utility Menu, 4-84

Printing, 4-3

Printing Date, 4-54

Printing Operation, 4-7

Printing Orientation, 4-24

Printing Preferences, 4-9

Problems

Installation, 7-50

Others, 7-58

Paper, 7-47

Print Quality, 7-41

When Nothing is Printed, 7-49

Profile

Add, 4-39

Allow Profile Selection, 4-40

Allow Setting Edition, 4-40

Comment, 4-38

Delete, 4-39

Edit, 4-39

Export, 4-39

Import, 4-39

Name, 4-38

Profile List, 4-38

Specifying Profiles, 4-71

[Profile] Sheet, 4-38

Q

[Quality] Sheet, 4-31

R

Rating Label, 1-5

Ready Indicator, 1-6

Required System Environment, 3-3

Resume Job, 4-7

S

Scaling, 4-43

[Security] Sheet, 4-36

Self-diagnostic Test, 1-10

Serial Number, 8-13

Service Call Display, 7-39

Shared Printer, 3-57

[Sharing] Sheet, 4-35

Show Icon in the Taskbar, 4-37

Specifications

Hardware, 8-2

Software, 8-3

Spooling at Host, 4-37

T

Toner Cartridge

Cleaning Toner Cartridge and Its Surroundings,

5-12

8

Index 8-11

Handling, 5-18

Replacement, 5-2, 5-8

Storage, 5-20

Using Up Toner, 5-3

Toner Cartridge Guide, 1-6

Toner Cover, 1-5

Toner Cover Release Button, 1-5

Toner Density, 4-66

Top Cover, 1-3

Top Rear Cover, 1-4

Transfer Roller, 1-6

Transparency, 2-4, 2-58

Troubleshooting Map, 7-2

U

Uninstallation, 3-77

Unusable Paper, 2-7

Usable Paper, 2-2

USB

Cable, 1-13

Class Driver, 3-9, 3-13, 3-25, 3-40

Connector, 1-4

Use Toner Save, 4-32, 4-66

8

V

Ventilation Slot, 1-5

Ventilation Slot (Air Intake Slot), 1-5

Ventilation Slot (Exhaust Slot), 1-5

W

Watermark, 4-25, 4-47

When Nothing is Printed, 7-49

8-12 Index

Location of the Serial Number

A serial number consists of four-alphabetic characters and a six-digit number.

IMPORTANT

The labels are required for a service engineer to check the serial number for service or maintenance. Be sure not to peel them off.

■ Rear View

100V

Serial No. XXXXX000000

XXXXXXXXXX

MADE IN XXXX

50/60Hz

F188200

6.7A

CF5

FL2-1096

Serial number

Outside View of the Packaging Box

LBP3600

9120A006[AA]

LKTA000000

Serial number

La se rB ea

Prin ter

LaserBeamPrinter ad e in

Ch ina /

Fa briq

CA ué

NO

e n C

N IN

C.

hin

LaserBeam

Printer

Location of the Serial Number 8-13

8

FA7-5909 (000) ©CANON INC. 2004

advertisement

Key Features

  • High quality print
  • Various paper types support
  • Two-sided printing
  • Network printing
  • Remote UI
  • Easy to use

Frequently Answers and Questions

How do I load paper into the printer?
Refer to the "Loading and Delivering Paper" section of the user's guide.
What types of paper can I use with the printer?
The printer supports a variety of paper types. Refer to the "Paper Requirements" section of the user's guide for a complete list.
How do I connect the printer to my computer?
You can connect the printer to your computer using a USB cable or a LAN cable. Refer to the "Connecting to a Computer" section of the user's guide for instructions.
How do I print a document?
Refer to the "Printing a Document" section of the user's guide for instructions.
How do I clean the printer?
Refer to the "Routine Maintenance" section of the user's guide for instructions.

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents